JP7084621B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of performing an effect.

Conventionally, there is a gaming machine capable of setting effect parameters for notification related to effect (speaker volume, LED brightness (light amount), etc.) (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-77362

However, with conventional gaming machines, there is room for improvement in improving the enjoyment of gaming .

An object of the present invention is to improve the interest of a game.

In a typical embodiment of the present invention, in a gaming machine capable of performing an effect, a display device capable of displaying the effect, a notification means capable of executing notification related to the effect, and an operating means are operated. The setting means includes a setting means capable of setting parameters related to the notification, and the setting means includes a first setting means capable of setting the presence or absence of a change in the parameter, and a second setting means different from the first setting means. When the first aspect in which the change of the parameter is specified in the first setting means by the operation of the operation means is selected, the predetermined effect becomes a specific aspect. It is possible to set the parameter to change more than before or after the specific aspect, and it is specified that the parameter does not change in the first setting means by operating the operating means. When the second aspect is selected, the parameter can be set so as not to change when the predetermined effect becomes the specific aspect or after the predetermined effect becomes the specific aspect.

According to one embodiment of the present invention, the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a perspective view which looked at the gaming machine from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the game control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the staging control system of a game machine. It is a figure explaining the transition state at the time of power-on of a gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the main process of a game control. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of the main process of a game control. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a probability setting change / confirmation process. It is a figure which shows the display example of the performance display device. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure start port switch common processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure hold information determination processing (first half). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure hold information determination process (the latter half). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the look-ahead jackpot determination process. Special Figure 1 It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 game processing (the first half). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 game processing (the latter half). Special Figure 1 It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of ordinary processing. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of ordinary processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 variation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 variation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fall lottery process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a small hit determination process. It is a table exemplifying the big hit probability, the small hit probability, and the fall probability. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a table exemplifying the distribution of the type of jackpot. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 information setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 information setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 variation pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fluctuation start information setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the time shortening fluctuation number update process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a procedure of processing during fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 change process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the special figure 1 display process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the special figure 2 display process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of the special figure 2 display process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fanfare / interval processing (first half). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fanfare / interval processing (the latter half). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 1. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit end setting process 2. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit end setting process 3. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the small hit fanfare middle processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the main processing of a staging control device. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the received command check process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the received command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of one-shot command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the look-ahead symbol system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the look-ahead variable system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a design system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the variable system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the variation effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a staging adjustment process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the accessory operation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a hit system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a fanfare effect setting process. It is a time chart exemplifying the state of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game executed in a normal gaming state. It is a time chart which illustrates the state of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game executed in the time saving state / probable change state. It is a time chart which shows the effect when an irregular big hit occurs from a normal game state. It is a screen transition diagram (No. 1) which shows the screen transition when an irregular jackpot occurs from a normal game state. It is a screen transition diagram (No. 2) which shows the screen transition when an irregular jackpot occurs from a normal game state. It is a screen transition diagram which shows the screen transition when an irregular jackpot occurs from waiting for a customer in a normal game state. This is another example of a screen transition diagram showing a screen transition when an irregular jackpot occurs while waiting for a customer in a normal game state. It is a time chart which shows the effect when an irregular jackpot occurs from a time saving state / probable change state. It is a screen transition diagram (No. 1) which shows the screen transition when an irregular jackpot occurs from a time saving state / probable change state. It is a screen transition diagram (No. 2) which shows the screen transition when an irregular jackpot occurs from a time saving state / probable change state. It is a screen transition diagram (No. 3) which shows the screen transition when an irregular jackpot occurs from a time saving state / probable change state. It is a screen transition diagram which shows the screen transition when an irregular jackpot occurs from waiting for a customer in a time saving state / probability change state. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the hole / player setting mode processing which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of the setting selection screen (menu screen) which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the volume / luminance adjustment screen which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining another example of the volume / luminance adjustment screen which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram which shows the screen transition about the case where the notification by the volume / luminance set in the adjustment screen of FIG. 71 is executed. In the second embodiment, it is a figure which shows an example of the adjustment screen which made it possible to set the parameter setting about the notification by a player corresponding to a predetermined effect. In the second embodiment, it is a figure which specifically explains the effect which raises a volume step by step. In the second embodiment, it is a screen transition diagram which shows the screen transition in the case where the notification by the content set in the adjustment screen of FIG. 74A is executed.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the description of the gaming machine, the front, back, left, and right refer to the direction seen from the player during the game.

[Overall view of the gaming machine]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a gaming machine.

The gaming machine 10 includes an opening / closing frame that is rotatably attached to the frame 11 fixed to the island equipment via a hinge. The opening / closing frame is composed of a front frame 12 (main body frame) and a glass frame 15.

A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game viewing area that makes the game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 visible.

The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be opened individually. For example, by opening only the glass frame 15, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed. Further, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not opened, the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 3) arranged on the back surface side of the game board 30 can be accessed. Can be done.

Various frame constituent members are arranged on the edge portion around the cover glass 14 of the glass frame 15.

Decorative devices 18a and 18b capable of producing light emission according to the gaming state are arranged in the upper center and the left side of the glass frame 15. The decorative devices 18a and 18b accommodate lighting members such as LEDs inside, and perform a light emitting effect according to the game state. The lighting members arranged inside the decorative devices 18a and 18b form a part of the frame decorative device 18 (see FIG. 4).

An upper speaker 19a is arranged in the upper right corner portion and the upper left corner portion of the glass frame 15, respectively. Apart from these upper speakers 19a, two lower speakers 19b are provided at the lower part of the gaming machine 10. The lower speaker 19b is arranged in the lower left corner portion of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner portion of the front frame 12. The upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b emit sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds, and the like.

On the right side of the glass frame 15, a projecting effect unit 13 extending in the vertical direction of the gaming machine 10 and projecting forward (on the player side) is arranged. The protrusion effect unit 13 is an effect device that performs a light emission effect or the like according to the progress state of the game. The lighting member arranged inside the protrusion effect unit 13 also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

At the lower part of the glass frame 15, an upper plate unit having an upper plate 21 capable of storing game balls is attached. The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are supplied to the ball launcher (not shown) one by one.

The upper plate unit further includes an effect operation device that accepts an input operation from the player, a ball lending operation device that accepts an input operation from the player, and a decoration device 22 that performs a light emission effect or the like according to the game state. ..

The effect operation device is an operation device in which the touch panel 25b is incorporated in the effect button 25, and is provided in the center of the upper part of the upper plate unit so that the player can easily operate the effect button 25. Further, although not shown, the effect button 25 has a built-in vibration mechanism for vibrating the effect button 25.

By operating the effect operation device by the player, it is possible to perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the special figure variation display game or the like displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode) or execute a notice effect that announces the result of the variable display game corresponding to the start memory in advance. It should be noted that the variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and when it is simply a variable display game, it is referred to as a special figure variable display game in this specification.

Further, the effect pattern may be changed by the player operating the effect operation device not only during the execution of the variable display game but also during the non-execution.

The game state when the variable display game is executed is composed of a plurality of game states. The normal gaming state (normal state) is a gaming state in which no special gaming state has occurred. Further, the special gaming state is, for example, a time saving state as a specific gaming state, a state in which the probability of occurrence of a special result (for example, a big hit) is high (probability variation state, probability fluctuation state, high probability state), or a big hit state in a variable display game. (Special game state), small hit game state (small hit state).

Here, the probability change state (specific game state) continues until the next big hit occurs (loop type), continues until a predetermined number of variable display games are executed (number cut type, ST), and There is a game that continues until a predetermined probability fall lottery is won (fall lottery type).

Further, it may be possible to always generate a probabilistic state when a big hit occurs, without determining whether or not to generate a probable change state by a big hit symbol random number, or to provide a winning device or the like provided with a specific area to specify. A probabilistic state may be generated when the game ball passes through the area.

The ball lending operation device is an operation device operated when the player rents a game ball, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper plate unit. The ball lending operation device includes a ball lending button 27, a return button 28, and a balance display unit 26. The ball lending button 27 is a button operated by the player when renting a gaming ball, and the return button 28 is a button for ejecting a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. This is a button operated by the player. The balance display unit 26 is a display area for displaying the balance of a prepaid card or the like.

The decoration device 22 contains a lighting member such as an LED inside, and is a device that performs a light emitting effect or the like according to a game state, and is provided on the front side portion of the upper plate unit. The lighting member arranged inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

Below the glass frame 15 provided with the above-mentioned upper plate unit and the like, and below the front frame 12, an operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of the ball launcher (not shown) and a game ball can be stored. A lower plate 23 is provided. The operation handle 24 is equipped with an air vibe mechanism that gives a vibrating feeling (vibration feeling) by intermittently blowing air (air) toward the attached player's fingers.

The operation handle 24 is located at the lower right of the front frame 12 and below the lower speaker 19b on the right side. When the player rotates the operation handle 24, the ball launcher launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 into the game area 32 of the game board 30. The rate of fire of the game ball launched from the ball launcher is set so as to increase as the amount of rotation of the operation handle 24 increases. That is, the ball launching device can change the launching force, which is the force (speed) for launching the game ball into the game area, in response to the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and the game can be played in various launch modes with different launching forces. You can fire a ball. The launch mode includes a left-handed hit (normal hit) in which the game ball is made to flow down on the left side of the game area 32, and a right-handed hit in which the game ball is made to flow down on the right side of the game area 32.

The lower plate 23 is arranged below the upper plate unit at a predetermined distance from the upper plate unit. The lower plate 23 has a ball extraction hole 23a that penetrates the bottom surface of the lower plate 23 in the vertical direction, and an opening / closing operation unit 23b for opening and closing the ball extraction hole 23a. When the player operates the opening / closing operation unit 23b to open the ball punching hole 23a, the game ball stored in the lower plate 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball pulling hole 23a.

[Game board]
Subsequently, the gaming board 30 of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 30 provided in the gaming machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-shaped game board main body 30a as a mounting base for various members. The game board main body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin, and a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is provided on the front surface of the game board main body 30a. The gaming machine 10 is configured to launch a gaming ball from a ball launching device into a gaming area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 to play a game. A windmill, an obstacle nail, or the like is disposed in the game area 32 as a member for changing the flow direction of the game ball, and the launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case (front component) 40 that forms a window portion that serves as a display area for a variable display game is attached to substantially the center of the game area 32. Behind the window portion formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 as an effect display device (variable display device) for variable display (variable display) of a plurality of identification information is arranged. The display device 41 is provided with, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that the display content can be visually recognized from the front side of the game board 30 via the window portion of the center case 40. The display device 41 is not limited to the one provided with a liquid crystal display, and may be provided with a display such as an EL or a CRT.

A plurality of variable display areas are provided on the display screen (display unit) of the display device 41, and identification information (special symbol) and a character that directs a variable display game are displayed in each variable display area. In addition, an image based on the progress of the game (big hit display, fanfare display, ending display, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

Further, the center case 40 has an inlet 40a to the warp passage 40e for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a stage on which the game ball passing through the warp passage 40e can roll. A portion 40b is provided. Since the stage portion 40b of the center case 40 is arranged above the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball rolled on the stage portion 40b is placed in the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37. It is easier to win a prize.

An upper staging unit 40c and a side staging unit 40d are provided on the upper part and the right side of the center case 40, respectively. The upper effect unit 40c and the side effect unit 40d form a part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and the board effect device 44 (see FIG. 4).

A normal symbol start gate (normal symbol start gate) 34 is provided in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40. Inside the normal drawing start gate 34, a gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 is provided. When the game ball driven into the game area 32 passes through the normal map start gate 34, the normal map variation display game is executed.

A general winning opening 35 is arranged in the game area 32 on the lower left of the center case 40, and a general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the game area 32 on the lower right of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switches (SW) 35a to 35n (see FIG. 3) provided in the general winning opening 35.

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, a start winning opening (starting opening 1, first starting winning area) 36 that gives a start condition for a special figure variation display game is provided. In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal variable winning device 37 (ordinary electric accessory,) provided with a second starting winning opening (starting opening 2, second starting winning area) below the starting gate 34 in the normal drawing. (Fuden) is provided. The normal variable winning device 37 includes a movable member (movable piece) 37b that slides so as to retract from the front to the back side to convert the game ball into a state in which the game ball can easily flow in. When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball cannot win the normal variable winning device 37. When the game ball wins the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, the special figure variable display game is executed as an auxiliary game. It should be noted that the starting winning opening 36 is likely to win a game ball when hitting left, and the normal variable winning device 37 is easy to win a game ball when hitting right.

The movable member 37b is a slide-opening / closing type ordinary electric accessory, and operates via the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) when the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode. When opened, the game ball changes to an open state (a state in which the game is easy to win, which is advantageous for the player), in which the game ball easily flows into the normally variable winning device 37.

The movable member 37b is controlled by the game control device 100, which will be described later. The game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of a winning easy state by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game and setting the winning probability of the normal map fluctuation display game to a higher probability than usual, or a normal game state. By making the time for which the easy-to-win state occurs longer than the easy-to-win state that occurs in the above-mentioned specific game state, a time-saving state (general electric support state) is generated. In addition, even in the probable change state (excluding the latent probable change state), the time saving state (the normal electric support state) occurs in duplicate.

In the game area 32 on the right side of the starting winning opening 36, the lower winning opening is opened by retracting from the front to the back by the lower large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 7). A first special variable winning device 38 (special electric accessory) having an opening / closing door 38c is provided. The first special variable winning device 38 converts the large winning opening from the closed state (closed state unfavorable to the player) to the open state (gaming state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variation display game. By facilitating the inflow of game balls into the large winning opening, a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. In the lower prize opening, a lower prize opening switch 38a (count switch) is provided as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening. It should be noted that the first special variable winning device 38 can easily win a game ball when hitting to the right.

The game area 32 above the normal variable winning device 37 has an opening / closing door 39c that opens the upper winning opening by rotating the upper end side in the direction of tilting to the right by the upper winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3). A second special variable winning device 39 is provided. The second special variable winning device 39 converts the large winning opening from the closed state (closed state unfavorable to the player) to the open state (special gaming state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variation display game. By facilitating the inflow of game balls into the large winning opening, a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. In the large winning opening, an upper large winning opening switch 39a (count switch) (see FIG. 3) is provided as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening. It should be noted that the second special variable winning device 39 can easily win a game ball when hitting to the right. Further, the lower prize opening switch 38a and the upper prize opening switch 39a are collectively referred to as a large winning opening switch 43.

A specific area 86 (so-called V winning opening) is provided inside the second special variable winning device 39. When a game ball enters the specific area 86 (V winning opening), the probability change state (high probability state, specific game state) after the end of the big hit is determined. The specific area 86 may be opened for a long time only in the case of a probable change jackpot so that the game ball can easily pass through. The game control device 100 can detect the passage of the game ball to the specific area 86 (V prize) via a sensor (specific area switch 72 described later) or the like, and when the V prize is detected, the game control device 100 shifts to a probable change state after the big hit ends. At the same time as confirming that the operation is to be performed, information (such as a command for passing through a specific area) indicating that the V prize has been won is transmitted to the effect control device 300 described later. Then, the effect control device 300 can notify the V prize on the display device 41 or the like.

When the game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, and the large winning opening of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) wins the winning opening. The number of prize balls corresponding to the type of the above is discharged from the payout device to the upper plate 21. Further, the lower game area 32 is provided with an out port 30b for collecting game balls that have not won a prize in the winning opening or the like. Further, in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, and the special variable winning devices 38, 39 and their vicinity, LEDs capable of emitting light when a game ball wins a prize (a board decoration device described later). A part of 46) is arranged.

Further, a special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game, special figure 2 variation display game) and a normal map variation display game are executed in the lower right corner of the game board main body 30a outside the game area 32. The batch display device 50 is provided. The batch display device 50 includes display units 51 to 60 that display information such as the current gaming state.

The batch display device 50 includes a first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (special figure 1 display, lamp D1) and a second special figure fluctuation for a fluctuation display game composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) and the like. The display unit 52 (special figure 2 display, lamp D2), the fluctuation display unit 53 for the normal figure fluctuation display game (normal figure display, lamps D8, D10, D18), and the start (hold) of each fluctuation display game. It has a storage display unit (special figure 1 hold display 54, special figure 2 hold display 55, normal figure hold display 56) for notifying the number of stored numbers. Special figure 1 The hold indicator 54 is composed of lamps D11 and D12. The special figure 2 hold indicator 55 is composed of lamps D13 and D14. The normal figure hold indicator 56 is composed of lamps D15 and D16.

Further, the batch display device 50 is informed that it is a right-handed hit (when it should be right-handed) or a left-handed hit (normal hitting time), and the first game state display unit 57 (first game state display, lamp). D7), the second game state display unit 58 (second game state display, lamp D17) that lights up when a time reduction state occurs to notify the occurrence of the time reduction state, and the probability state of a big hit when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on is high. Third game status display unit 59 (third game status display, probability status display unit, lamp D9) that displays the status, the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (number of times of opening and closing of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39) A round display unit 60 (lamps D3-D6) for displaying the above is provided.

In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, the variable display game is executed by the variable display in which the identification information (for example, the central segment) is repeatedly turned on and off (blinking). The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are not limited to such a segment type display unit, and may be composed of an aggregate of a plurality of LEDs, and when a variable display is executed. All LEDs are turned on and off (all LEDs blink at the same time), circular lighting (turns on and off in a predetermined order at predetermined time intervals from any one LED), or multiple lights. It may be performed by turning on / off (blinking) or circulating lighting by a predetermined number of LEDs among the LEDs. Also in the normal figure display 53, the variable display game is executed by the variable display (blinking) in which the lamps D10 and D18 are repeatedly turned on and off. Further, the normal figure display 53 can be appropriately configured in the same manner as the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52.

The lamp display device 80 includes lamp display units 1 and 2 (LEDs) that execute variable display (blinking) that repeats lighting display and extinguishing display as a symbol (fourth special symbol described later), and start of each special symbol variation display game. (Holding) It has a lamp display unit 3-6 (LED) for notifying the number of stored items. The lamp display device 80 is controlled by the staging control device 300 (described later).

The lamp display units 1 and 2 blink at a predetermined blinking cycle (for example, 200 msec (millisecond)) as a fluctuation display. While the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, and the normal figure display 53 of the batch display device 50 is measured by the game control device 100, the lamp of the lamp display device 80 The fluctuation time of the display units 1 and 2 is measured by the staging control device 300 (described later).

The lamp display units 3 and 4 (special figure 1 hold LED 1, special figure 1 hold LED 2) display the number of special figure 1 hold (first start storage number) depending on the combination of the off state, the on state, and the blinking state. Similarly, the lamp display units 5 and 6 (special figure 2 hold LED 1, special figure 2 hold LED 2) display the special figure 2 hold number (second start storage number) depending on the combination of the off state, the on state, and the blinking state. do. The lamp display unit 3-6 ends the display of the number of holds due to the occurrence of a big hit, but displays the number of holds except when the display device 41 is in the state of a big hit (including the case where the reach described later occurs in the display device 41). conduct.

Next, the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10, the normal map variation display game, and the special map variation display game will be described in detail.

In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by launching a gaming ball from a ball launching device (not shown) toward the gaming area 32. The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstacle nails, windmills, etc. arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the normal drawing start gate 34, the general winning opening 35, and the starting winning opening. 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 38, 39 is won, or the ball flows into the out port 30b provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32. Then, when a game ball wins a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36, a normal variable winning device 37, or a special variable winning device 38, 39, a number of winning balls corresponding to the type of winning opening will be used as a payout device. It is discharged to the upper plate 21 through.

The normal figure start gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal figure start gate 34. When the game ball passes through the normal map start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the normal map variation display game is executed based on the determination result of the hit determination random number value extracted at this time.

When the normal map fluctuation display game cannot be started, for example, when the normal map fluctuation display game has already been played and the normal map fluctuation display game has not ended, or when the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is a hit, it is normal. When the game ball passes through the normal drawing start gate 34 when the variable winning device 37 is converted to the open state, the storage number is added (+1) if the normal drawing start storage number is less than the upper limit number.

The hit determination random value for determining the hit / miss of the normal map variation display game is stored in the normal map start memory, and when the hit judgment random value matches the judgment value, the normal map variation display is performed. The game is a hit and a specific result mode (specific result) is derived.

The normal map fluctuation display game is executed by the normal map display 53 provided in the batch display device 50. The normal identification information 53 is composed of LEDs that indicate a hit when the normal identification information (normal figure) is lit and a deviation when the normal identification information (normal figure) is off, and the normal identification information fluctuates by blinking the LED. The display is performed, and after a predetermined variation display time has elapsed, the result is displayed by turning on or off the LED.

When the normal figure random value extracted when passing through the normal figure start gate 34 is a hit value, the normal symbol displayed on the normal figure display 53 stops in the hit state and becomes the hit state. At this time, by driving the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3), the movable member 37b is converted into an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds), and the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 is converted into an open state. Winning is allowed.

The winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 and the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3) and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected as the start winning ball of the special figure 1 variable display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit, and the game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37 is the special figure 2. It is detected as a winning ball for starting a variable display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit.

When the start winning ball of the special figure variation display game is detected, the jackpot random number value, the jackpot symbol random value, each variation pattern random value, and the like are extracted. These random numbers are stored in the special figure reservation storage area (a part of the RAM) of the game control device 100 as the special figure start winning memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, up to 8 times). The stored number of the special figure start prize memory is displayed on the special figure 1 hold display 54 and the special figure 2 hold display 55 for notifying the start prize number of the batch display device 50, and is also displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. Is displayed.

The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variation display game on the special figure 1 display 51 based on the winning to the start winning opening 36 or the first start memory. Further, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 variable display game on the special figure 2 display 52 based on the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 or the second start memory.

The special figure 1 variable display game (1st special figure variable display game) and the special figure 2 variable display game (2nd special figure variable display game) have identification information (identification information) on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52. This is performed by displaying the special symbol (special symbol) in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying the predetermined result mode.

In the present embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called simultaneous variable machine, and the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be put into an execution state at the same time (both) independently of each other. If a big hit occurs in the special figure 1 variable display game (there is no small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game in this embodiment), the running special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a loss result. do. When a big hit occurs in the special figure 2 variable display game, the running special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a loss result.

If a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 variable display game, the running special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted. In this case, the measurement of the fluctuation time by the special figure 1 game processing timer is interrupted, the derivation of the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (display of the stop symbol corresponding to the stop symbol number) is postponed, and the special figure 2 fluctuation display is performed. After the small hit operation related to the game is completed, the interrupted special figure 1 variable display game can be restarted.

Further, when the game ball wins the normal variable winning device 37 by right-handed in the normal game state, the special figure 2 variable display game starts to fluctuate, but basically fluctuates for a long time (long fluctuation, for example, 10 minutes). During this period, if a big hit occurs in the special figure 1 variable display game, it will be forcibly stopped.

Further, the display device 41 executes a decorative special figure variation display game in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc.) are variablely displayed corresponding to each special figure variation display game.

In the decorative special symbol variation display game on the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the above-mentioned numbers and the like is left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), and middle (third special symbol). ) Is started, and the fluctuating symbols are sequentially stopped after a predetermined time, and the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is displayed. In addition, the display device 41 performs various staging displays such as the appearance of characters in order to improve the interest. Further, in the decorative special symbol variation display game, as another decorative special symbol (identification information), the fourth special symbol is displayed by repeating (blinking) the lighting display and the extinguishing display on the lamp display units 1 and 2 of the lamp display device 80. fluctuate. The fluctuation display of the lamp display units 1 and 2 is stopped by "turning off" in the case of a miss and "lighting" in the case of a big hit or a small hit after a predetermined time from the start.

Regarding the decorative special figure variable display game in the display device 41, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may be executed in different display devices or different display areas, or the same display may be executed. It may be executed in the device or the display area. Further, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game may be in the execution state (executed state) at the same time.

When the game ball is won in the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random value at the time of winning detection is the big hit value), as a result of the special figure fluctuation display game. A specific result mode (special result mode) is derived from the displayed symbol, and a big hit state (special game state) is obtained. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as "7, 7, 7" are aligned).

At this time, the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 are changed from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) by energizing the large winning opening solenoids (38b, 39b) (see FIG. 3). Will be converted. That is, the large winning openings provided in the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 are wide open until a predetermined time or a predetermined number of game balls are won, and during this time, the player can acquire many game balls. Granted.

When the game ball is won in the first start winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random value at the time of winning detection is the small hit value), the special figure variation display game. As a result of the above, a specific result mode (small hit result mode) is derived from the displayed symbol, and a small hit state is obtained. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a small hit result mode. In the present embodiment, the big hit random value is also used for the small hit determination, but the small hit value (small hit determination value) is different from the big hit value (big hit determination value).

At this time, the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 are converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined short time by energizing the large winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b (see FIG. 3). Since the full opening time of the big winning opening is shorter in the small hit state (small hit game state) than in the big hit state (special game state), the game that the player can acquire in the small hit state than in the big hit state. The value (number of balls acquired) is small. In both the small hit state and the big hit state, the big winning opening is open, but the big hit state may be referred to as the first special gaming state, and the small hit state may be referred to as the second special gaming state.

In the present embodiment, in the small hit state, only the special variable winning device 38 operates and only the lower large winning opening is opened, but in the small hit state, both the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 are used. It may be configured to operate and open both the lower prize opening and the upper prize opening.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the probabilistic state, the small hit RUSH (rush) state in which small hits frequently occur due to the special figure 2 variation display game is obtained. Then, in the small hit rush, the special variable winning device 38 is opened at a high frequency. It should be noted that even in the short time state, a configuration in which the small hit RUSH (rush) state is possible is also possible.

Here, the difference between a big hit and a small hit will be described.

A big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device, and a small hit is a specific result without the operation of the condition device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs (stop display of the big hit symbol) in the special figure fluctuation display game, and when the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and it is special as a special electric accessory. It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning devices 38, 39 is set. The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the above-mentioned specific flag is not set as in the case of winning a small hit lottery, for example. The "conditional device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on / off by software as described above, or a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on / off electrically. Further, "conditional device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of an electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term that has the meaning of.

Specifically, in the case of a big hit, the special variable winning device is opened by setting the big hit flag, whereas in the case of a small hit, the special variable winning device is set by setting the small hit flag. Is released.

After the end of the big hit state, if there is a V prize (passing the game ball to the specific area 86) during the big hit state, the game shifts to the probable change state, and if there is no V prize, the game state other than the probable change state (normal). It shifts to the game state or the time saving state). On the other hand, after the end of the small hit state (shorter time than the big hit state), the game returns to the original gaming state before the start of the small hit state. Although the jackpot probability is low in the jackpot state, the jackpot probability before the start of the small hit state is maintained in the small hit state (the probability state does not change in the small hit state). Therefore, the small hit rush state in which small hits occur frequently continues from the start of the probability variation state to the occurrence of the big hit state (until the result of the special figure fluctuation display game becomes the big hit result), and the big hit probability throughout the small hit rush state. Is maintained with a high probability (probability change state).

The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be configured as separate displays or the same display, but the special figure variation display games are not executed at the same time. Is set.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game.

Further, although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the count switch (38a). , 39a) includes a coil for magnetic detection, and a non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that detects a game ball by utilizing the phenomenon that the magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. in use. Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 or the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main body frame opening detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 or the like is a machine. Microswitches with similar contacts can be used.

Here, the main variable display game and the secondary variable display game in the present embodiment will be described. The main variation display game is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the main starting area (main area, main starting winning opening) where the game ball often enters, and the dependent variation display game is performed from the main starting area. Is also executed based on the entry of the game ball into the sub-starting area (subordinate area, sub-starting winning opening) where the game ball is rarely entered. The main variable display game and the secondary variable display game can be in the running state at the same time (both).

In the normal game state, as will be described later, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a long fluctuation (long fluctuation, for example, 10 minutes), and it is recommended that the game ball enter the first start winning opening 36. .. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, the main starting area is the first starting winning opening 36 (starting port 1, the first starting winning area), and the secondary starting area is the normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 2, the second starting winning area). Therefore, the main variable display game is a special figure 1 variable display game, and the subordinate variable display game is a special figure 2 variable display game. Further, in the normal gaming state, left-handed strike, which facilitates the entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening 36, is more advantageous for the player than right-handed strike, and is recommended.

In the time saving state, the game control device 100 controls so that the jackpot probability (the jackpot probability of the special figure) is set to a low probability and the Fuden support (electric support) is executed. Therefore, in the time saving state, the main starting area becomes the normal variable winning device 37 and the secondary starting area becomes the first starting winning opening 36. Therefore, the main variable display game becomes the special figure 2 variable display game, and the secondary variable display game becomes special. FIG. 1 This is a variable display game. In addition, right-handed striking is recommended as the launch mode of the game ball in the short-time state.

In the probabilistic state, the game control device 100 controls so as to be in a small hit rush state in which small hits frequently occur. Therefore, in the probabilistic state, right-handed striking aiming at the normal variable winning device 37 and the special variable winning device 38 is recommended as the launch mode of the game ball. Therefore, in the probabilistic state, the main starting area becomes the normal variable winning device 37 and the secondary starting area becomes the first starting winning opening 36, as in the time saving state. Therefore, the main variable display game becomes the special figure 2 variable display game. The follow-up variable display game is a special figure 1 variable display game.

In addition, the jackpot is an irregular jackpot in which a jackpot state is generated by the jackpot result (first special result) of the main fluctuation display game and a jackpot state is generated by the jackpot result (first special result) of the slave variable display game. There is a big hit. In addition, the small hits include a normal small hit (normal small hit) in which a small hit state is generated by the small hit result (second special result) of the main fluctuation display game, and a small hit result (second special result) of the secondary fluctuation display game. As a result), there is an irregular small hit that causes a small hit state. In this embodiment, since there is no small hit result in the special figure 1 variable display game and there is a small hit result only in the special figure 2 variable display game, only irregular small hits can be generated in the normal gaming state, and the time is shortened. Only normal small hits can occur in the state and the probable change state.

[Game control device]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the game control system of the game machine 10. The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100 (main board), and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that collectively controls a game, and is a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer). The data bus 140 that connects the CPU unit 110 having the 111, the input unit 120 having the input port, the output unit 130 having the output port, the driver, etc., the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. And so on.

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates an operating clock of the CPU, a timer interrupt, and a clock that serves as a reference for a random number generation circuit. It has an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. A predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 is supplied to the game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 to enable operation. Will be done.

The power supply device 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 having an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of DC32V from a 24V AC power supply and a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V and DC5V from the voltage of DC32V. A backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the gaming microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal or reset signal that notifies the game control device 100 of the occurrence or recovery of a power failure. It is provided with a control signal generation unit 430 and the like that generate and output a control signal such as.

In the present embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are on separate boards or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, mainly. It may be configured to be provided on a substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the embodiment. By providing it, it is possible to exclude it from the target of replacement and reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or even after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors, for example, the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to, for example, 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and changes the power failure monitoring signal, and also resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed down and turned on, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111c in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forced. The process of initializing to is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

Further, the game control device 100 (main board) includes a setting key switch 93. The setting key switch 93 makes it possible to change the probability set value (set value) according to the setting related to the game condition (game) by turning it on by the rotation operation of the operator or the like. The RAM initialization switch 112 can also be used as a setting value change switch that can change the probability setting value according to the operation of the operator. In the present embodiment, the probability setting value is a setting value for setting a winning probability such as a big hit probability or a small hit probability, but other game conditions (such as staging) other than the probability are also changed according to the probability setting value. It is possible. The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 constitute a setting changing means (setting changing device 42) capable of changing the setting (probability setting value) related to the game condition. In addition to the RAM initialization switch 112, another switch may also serve as the setting value changing switch, or may provide a dedicated setting value changing switch.

The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are provided on the game control device 100 inside the game machine 10 and are arranged at positions that cannot be operated (positions that cannot be accessed) unless the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened. Will be done. That is, a general player cannot access and operate the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112.

As will be described later, when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on (power failure recovery, power recovery), the gaming machine 10 sets a probability setting value according to the on / off state of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112. It is possible to shift to various states such as a changeable setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode) and a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed.

In the present embodiment, the probability setting value is defined in, for example, 6 steps, and the probability setting value 1 (setting 1), the probability setting value 2 (setting 2), the probability setting value 3 (setting 3), and the probability setting value 4 (setting). 4), there are a probability setting value 5 (setting 5) and a probability setting value 6 (setting 6). In general, setting 1 is the most disadvantageous setting for the player, and setting 6 is the most advantageous setting for the player. Settings 1 and 2 are low settings, settings 3 and 4 are intermediate settings (intermediate settings), and settings 5 and 6 are high settings.

In the probability setting change process, every time the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed by the operator, the work setting value (setting) in the work setting value area is set to the setting value 0 (setting 1, probability setting value 1) →. Setting value 1 (setting 2, probability setting value 2) → setting value 2 (setting 3, probability setting value 3) → setting value 3 (setting 4, probability setting value 4) → setting value 4 (setting 5, probability setting value 5) ) → Setting value 5 (Setting 6, probability setting value 6) → Setting value 0 (Setting 1) → Setting value 1 (Setting 2) → ... In this way, the RAM initialization switch 112 also functions as a set value change switch. For convenience of explanation, the work setting values 0 to 5 are provided corresponding to the probability setting values 1 to 6 in the setting change state (setting change mode), but the work setting value and the probability setting value are the same. It may be treated as the same in the numerical range (that is, 0 to 5 or 1 to 6) (the work setting value and the probability setting value are set to the same numerical value).

Instead of operating the RAM initialization switch 112 (setting value changing switch), the setting key switch 93 may be rotated to a predetermined position to change the probability setting value. Moreover, the probability setting value is not limited to 6 steps. Then, the performance display device 152 in which the display probability setting value corresponding to the selected work setting value of 0 to 5 is, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment type (8-segment type including the dot Dp) display. Etc. are displayed.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111b, and a RAM (random access memory) 111c that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111b non-volatilely stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control. The RAM 111c is used as a work area of the CPU 111a and a storage area for various signals and random values during game control. Information about the game (game information) is stored, and the stored information is stored even if a power failure occurs. Is a possible retention and storage means. As the ROM 111b or the RAM 111c, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111b stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to refer to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start storage to determine the variation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include a table for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), which is a fluctuation pattern after the reach state, and fluctuations before the reach state. A table for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a pattern (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes an advantageous gaming state (special gaming state) for the player when the special result mode is adopted, a part of the plurality of display results is already derived and displayed at a stage where it is not yet derived. A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the conditions for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses to the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. Refers to a display mode that does not exist. Further, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas of the display device. After displaying, when the variation display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the left and right variation display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example,). The state in which the variable display is stopped due to the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the conditions for the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas are satisfied (for example, the same identification information). (However, the special result mode is excluded) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variable-displayed from the reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as a system (type) of reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode (big hit mode) is different (the degree of expectation is different), normal reach (N reach), Special 1 reach (SP1 reach), special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The expected degree (expected value) of the jackpot increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. Further, the reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived (when it becomes a big hit) in the special figure variable display game. That is, it may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived (when it is out of order) in the special figure variable display game. Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is a state in which there is a high possibility that a big hit will occur as compared with the case where the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111a executes a game control program in the ROM 111b to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 Control the entire system. Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a big hit random number for determining a big hit in a special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining a big hit symbol, and a small hit for determining a small hit symbol. With a random number generation circuit for generating fluctuation pattern random numbers, etc. for determining fluctuation patterns in symbol random numbers and special figure fluctuation display games (including the execution time of fluctuation display games in various reach and fluctuation display without reach). , Equipped with a clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 msec (milliseconds)) for the CPU 111a based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock that gives an update timing of the random number generation circuit. ing.

Further, the CPU 111a acquires any one of the variation pattern tables from the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b in the process related to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111a has a game result (big hit or miss) of the special figure fluctuation display game, a probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state, and a start storage number. Based on the above, one of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables. Here, the CPU 111a serves as a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b when the special figure variation display game is executed.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the prize ball. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit 600, and controls for paying out the lending ball.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a radio wave sensor 62 (panel radio wave sensor) for detecting the emission of radio waves to the game machine, a gate switch 34a of the normal starting gate 34, and a starting port 1 in the first starting winning opening 36. Switch 36a, starting port 2 switch 37a in the second starting winning opening 37 (normal variable winning device), winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35, large winning opening switch 43 of the special variable winning opening devices 38, 39 (lower big winning device) It is connected to the mouth switch 38a and the upper prize opening switch 39a), and a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches is input to a 0V-5V positive logic signal. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 for conversion is provided.

Further, the interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is connected to the specific area switch 72, the remaining ball discharge port switch 73, and the out ball detection switch 74. The specific area switch 72 detects the passage of the game ball (V winning) to the specific area 86 (V winning opening). The remaining ball discharge port switch 73 detects a game ball that has passed through the remaining ball discharge port that discharges the game ball from the special variable winning devices 38, 39. The out-ball detection switch 74 may detect only the game balls that pass through the out port 30b, or may detect all the game balls that have been launched into the game area and have finished the game.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123, the third input port 124, or the fourth input port 126, and is read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the gate switch 34a, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 43 are input to the third input port 124. ..

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the second input port 123.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the specific area switch 72, the remaining ball discharge port switch 73, or the out ball detection switch 74 is input to the fourth input port 126.

Further, the second input port 123 has a detection signal of a magnetic sensor switch 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the game machine 10, and a glass frame opening detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10. A signal from the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main body frame opening detection switch) provided on the switch 63, the front frame 12 (main body frame), and a signal from the vibration sensor 65 that detects the vibration of the game machine 10 are input. ..

Further, the second input port 123 takes in the setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to the test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become.

The data held by the third input port 124 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the third input port 124. be able to. The same applies to the second input port 123, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, the input unit 120 indicates a frame radio wave illegal signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shoot ball out switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow. The first input port 122 that takes in the overflow switch signal, the touch switch signal based on the input of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24, and the signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 and supplies them to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Is provided. The overflow switch signal is a signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored (full) in the lower plate 23. The frame radio wave illegal signal is a signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 (main body frame) detecting the radio wave, and the payout busy signal is in a state where the payout control device 200 can accept the command. It is a signal indicating whether or not.

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122, and is taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RST is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130 to turn off the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test firing test device. It is configured as follows.

Further, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RST is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the game microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset in order to prevent the system from malfunctioning, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged in a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that the one-way communication is such that a signal cannot be input to the game control device 100 from the side of the staging control device 300.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of the accreditation body (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like are transmitted via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass-produced product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start port switch output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test firing test device via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the gaming machine controls the game. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the state cannot be achieved.

The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not go through the buffer, and the like. There is. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test device.

Further, the output unit 130 has a solenoid (general electric solenoid) 37c connected to the data bus 140 to open the normal variable winning device 37, and a lower large winning opening solenoid 38b (large winning opening) to open the first special variable winning device 38. Solenoid 1), upper prize opening solenoid 39b (large prize opening solenoid 2) for opening the second special variable winning device 39, and lever solenoid 86b for operating the lever to open the specific area 86. Two output ports 134 are provided.

Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50, and the batch display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal 71. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photo relay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device installed in a game store (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.), and information about the game machine 10 can be externally transmitted. It can be supplied to the device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening / closing data signals of the peripheral current solenoid 37c and the winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal (drive). Circuit) 138a, batch display device output from the second driver 138b and fourth output port 136 that output the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 135. The third driver 138c that outputs the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the current drawing side of 50, and the fourth that outputs the external information signal supplied to the external device such as the management device from the fifth output port 137 to the external information terminal 71. A driver 138d is provided.

A DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Further, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a current is passed through the anode terminal of the LED via the segment wire by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and a current is drawn from the cathode terminal via the segment wire by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in, and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal 71, supplies the external information signal with a level of 12V, so that DC12V is supplied. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to an external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be capable of bilateral communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can send and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since the transmission / reception of such data is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the serial data (control data, lighting pattern data, character code (character code), etc.) output from the second output port 134, and receives the performance display device 152 (status display device). A driver 150 for driving is provided. In the present embodiment, the performance display device 152 is composed of a plurality of (4) 7-segment type (8-segment type including dot Dp) display (LED lamp), and the driver 150 is an LED driver. It is not limited to.

The performance display device 152 is provided on the game control device 100 (main board), but may be provided at another location. For example, the performance display device 152 can display a display probability setting value, an accessory ratio, a ball ejection rate, and the number of ejected balls.

Here, the number of ejected balls is the number of game balls ejected from the game area 32 (also referred to as the number of out balls), and the number of game balls that have passed through the winning opening (the number of winning balls) and the game that has passed through the out opening 30b. It is the total with the number of spheres. The number of ejected balls can be obtained by counting the signal of the out ball detection switch 74 or the like. In the present embodiment, the winning openings include a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting opening 1), a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting opening 2), and Special variable winning devices 38 and 39 (large winning openings) are included.

The payout rate is the ratio (ratio) of the total number of prize balls to the number of ejected balls (or the number of launched balls), and is calculated by (number of acquired balls ÷ number of ejected balls) × 100 (%). That is, the payout rate is the number of acquired balls (total number of prize balls) per 100 ejected balls.

For example, the prize ratio is in the jackpot state among the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) obtained by winning a prize in the winning opening during a predetermined period (for example, from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present). It is the ratio (%) (= so-called continuous prize ratio) of the number of prize balls (the number of balls acquired by the character) obtained by winning the big prize opening. In addition, the prize ratio may be the ratio of the number of prize balls (during the big hit state and the small hit state) obtained by winning the big prize opening (= big winning opening ratio) among the total number of prize balls. Or, the ratio of the number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize in the large winning opening and the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening) (= commonly used so-called bonus ratio (total bonus ratio) )) May be.

[Production control device]
Next, the configuration of the staging control device 300 (sub-board) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram of the effect control system of the gaming machine 10.

The effect control device 300 is for displaying images on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 made of an amusement chip (IC) and the main control microcomputer 311 like the game microcomputer 111. It is equipped with a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 that controls sound output in order to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speaker 19.

The main control microcomputer 311 holds a program ROM 321 consisting of a program executed by the CPU and a PROM (programmable read-only memory) that stores various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and stored contents even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. A possible FeRAM 323 and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a timing means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311.

Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the production content, instructs the VDP 312 of the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 of the playback sound, lights the decorative lamp, and the motor. And the drive control of the solenoid, the management of the production time, etc. are executed.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing. STS is input. It should be noted that the VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM. The wait signal WAIT etc. for the purpose is also input.

The staging control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal sync signal HSYNC, and a vertical sync signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

A sound ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. The effect control command signal (effect command) is a decorative special figure hold number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, a stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via the command I / F331. Receive as. Since the gaming microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the staging control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. There is.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 and a glass frame 15 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect provided on a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 and a game board 30 (including a center case 40) that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, a frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided. A panel effect movable body control circuit 334 for driving and controlling a device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided. The board decoration device 46 may include the above-mentioned lamp display device 80.

These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. It should be noted that a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling a frame effect device such as a motor provided on the glass frame 15 may be provided.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the effect button 25, and a motor in the board effect device 44. A function to detect the on / off state of the effect switch 47 (effect motor switch) that detects the initial position and input a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and a volume control switch provided in the effect control device 300. A switch input circuit 336 that detects the state of the 335 and inputs the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and the electronic components controlled by the effect control device 300. DC32V, display device 41 consisting of liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motor and LED, DC5V for power supply voltage of command I / F331, DC15V for driving motor, LED and speaker It is configured to do.

Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, the DC- is used to generate DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V. A DC converter is provided in the staging control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. In addition, VDP312 (VDPREST signal), sound source LSI314, amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives the speaker, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) that drive and control lamps, motors, etc., are output from the main control microcomputer 311. It is supplied to the signal) and puts them in the reset state. Further, a cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the staging control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the staging control device 300 is turned on.

Next, the game control performed in these control circuits will be described. In the CPU 111a of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, a random value for hit determination in the normal figure is extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal figure start gate 34, and the ROM 111b Compared with the judgment value stored in, the hit / miss of the normal figure fluctuation display game is judged.

Then, after displaying the identification symbol variable for a predetermined time on the normal map display, a normal map variable display game for stopping and displaying is displayed. When the result of the normal fluctuation display game is a hit, a special result mode is displayed on the normal figure display, the normal electric solenoid 37c is operated, and the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is operated for a predetermined time (for example,). (0.3 seconds) Control to open as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). If the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is out of sync, the normal map display is controlled to display the result mode of the out of alignment.

Further, the start winning prize (starting memory) is memorized based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36, and the jackpot determination of the special figure 1 variation display game is made based on the starting memory. The random value for use is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b, and the hit / miss of the special figure 1 variation display game is determined.

Further, the start memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variable winning device 37, and the random value for jackpot determination of the special figure 2 variable display game is stored based on the start memory. Is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b, and the hit / miss of the special figure 2 variation display game is determined.

Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game to the effect control device 300. Then, the special figure variation display game in which the identification symbol is variablely displayed for a predetermined time and then stopped and displayed is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37) of the game ball flowing down the game area 32. Make an eggplant.

Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 displays the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Further, the effect control device 300 performs processing such as setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling light emission of various LEDs based on the control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a hit, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and generates a special game state. Let me. In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111a controls, for example, to open the opening / closing door 39c of the special variable winning device 39 by the large winning opening solenoid 39b so that the game ball can flow into the special winning opening. ..

Then, either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in the big winning opening, or a predetermined opening time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses from the opening of the big winning opening. One round (R) is to open the big winning opening until the above condition is achieved, and this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 times, 11 times or 2 times) control (cycle game). I do. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening / closing control means for controlling the opening / closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of alignment, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are controlled to display the result mode of the deviation.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state (probability change state) is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure fluctuation display game is higher than that of the normal probability state. Further, regardless of which of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game results in a high probability state, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game Both are in a high probability state.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 are controlled to be in the normal fluctuation operating state, and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 per unit time is controlled as compared with the case where the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the normal operating state. Since the opening time is controlled to be substantially longer, the normal electric support state is set. Even in the high probability state (normal probability change state) excluding the latent probability change state, the time saving state is duplicated and the normal electric support (electric support) is executed.

For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to shorten the time so that the execution time (normal map fluctuation time) of the above-mentioned normal map fluctuation display game is set to the second variable display time shorter than the normal first variable display time (for example). 10,000 msec is 1000 msec). In the time-reduced state, the execution time of the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation time) is also shorter than usual, and the time reduction variation of the special figure fluctuation display game is also executed.

Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map fluctuation display game to be a second stop time (for example, 704 msec) shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 msec). Is.

Further, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) is the first opening time (for example, 100 msec) in the normal state. It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer (for example, 1352 msec).

Further, in the time saving state, the number of times the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened (the number of times the normal electric power is opened) is larger than the number of times the first opening time (for example, 2 times) is obtained with respect to the result of one hit of the normal fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the second opening number (for example, 4 times). Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to set the probability (normal probability) of the hit result of the normal map fluctuation display game to be higher than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operating state.

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the normal fluctuation time, the normal stop time, the number of times the normal power is opened, the normal power opening time, and the normal power probability. Try to extend the conversion time longer than usual. As a result, in the time saving state, the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 becomes easier than in the normal gaming state, and the number of executions of the special figure variation display game per unit time can be increased as compared with the normal gaming state. It is also possible to set multiple types of time saving states that change different things. Further, it may be set so that the movable member 37b is not opened in the normal operating state (probability of normal drawing is 0). Further, in the case of a hit, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Further, the high-probability state and the time-saving state can be generated independently, and both can be generated at the same time, or only one can be generated.

[Transition state when power is turned on]
FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a transition state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on (power restoration). As described above, the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 shift to four states (modes) as shown in FIG. 5 depending on the on / off state of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 when the power is turned on.

First, when the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are turned on when the power is turned on, the probability setting value (setting value) can be changed in the setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode). (See A1027-A1036 and FIG. 8 in FIG. 6B).

Next, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on but the RAM initialization switch 112 is off when the power is turned on, the state shifts to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed (FIG. 6B A1031-A1036 and FIG. 8).

If the setting key switch 93 is off but the RAM initialization switch 112 is on when the power is turned on, the state shifts to the RAM initialization state (RAM clear mode) and the RAM initialization process (RAM clear). The process) is executed, and the RAM 111c is initialized (see A1042-1444 in FIG. 6B).

If the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off when the power is turned on, the state shifts to the normal power recovery state (normal power recovery mode), and the power is simply restored.

[Control of game control device]
Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 7 performed in a predetermined time cycle (4 msec (milliseconds) in this embodiment). That is, the game control program corresponding to the control processing of the game microcomputer 111 is composed of a main program (caller routine) corresponding to the main processing and an interrupt processing program (interrupt processing routine) corresponding to the timer interrupt processing. ..

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main process will be described. 6A and 6B are flowcharts showing the procedure of the main processing by the game control device 100. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In the flowchart of the process executed by the game control device 100, the code (number) of the step is represented as "A ***".

As shown in FIG. 6A, when the game control device 100 starts the main process, it first executes a process of disabling interrupts (A1001). Further, the stack pointer setting process for setting the stack pointer, which is the start address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when an interrupt occurs, is executed (A1002).

Subsequently, register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, when the RAM address is in the range of 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

Next, the game control device 100 outputs a firing prohibition signal and sets the firing permission signal to the prohibited state (A1005). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing prohibition signal, and the firing of the game ball is prohibited. After that, the game control device 100 reads the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 (A1006). That is, the signals from the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read.

Further, the game control device 100 sets a power supply delay timer (A1007). A program of a slave control means (for example, a payout control device 200 or an effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to instructions from a game control device 100 that is a main control means by setting a predetermined initial value in the power supply delay timer. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting until is normally started is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first, and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device Can prevent the command from being missed. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control device (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It serves as a waiting means for setting the waiting time.

Further, the timekeeping of the power delay timer is performed using a storage area (RAM area or register, etc. that is not subject to validity determination) that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation). As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of a RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, so that it is possible to prevent the control at the time of turning on the power from becoming complicated.

By reading the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 can be reliably detected. That is, if the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read after the standby time has elapsed, the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 can be operated or the power is turned on after the standby time has elapsed. It is necessary to continue to operate the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 from the time until the elapse of the standby time. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, the operation of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 performed at the time of turning on the power cannot be accepted without performing such a troublesome operation. Can be prevented.

When the power delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 executes time counting of the standby time and a process of monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (A1008 to A1010).

When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first reads the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus to determine whether or not a power failure has occurred. (A1008). When a power failure occurs (the result of A1008 is "Y"), the machine waits until the power of the gaming machine is turned off.

When the power failure has not occurred (the result of A1008 is "N"), the game control device 100 updates the power-on delay timer by -1 (A1009), and determines whether or not the value of the timer is 0. (A1010). If the value of the timer is not 0 (the result of A1010 is "N"), that is, if the waiting time has not ended, the process returns to the process of step A1008.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the start of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power cutoff are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the value of the timer is 0 (the result of A1010 is "Y"), that is, when the standby time ends, the game control device 100 has a read / write RWM (read / write) such as RAM or EEPROM. (Memory) access is permitted (A1011), and off-data is output to all output ports (set to no output) (A1012).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a serial port (a port previously mounted on the game microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in the present embodiment) (A1013). ).

Further, here, the driver 150 for driving the performance display device 152 (status display device) may be initially set. The game control device 100 writes a command including control data corresponding to the contents of the initial setting to the transmission buffer of the second output port 134 (serial communication circuit) and transmits the command to the driver 150. For example, the game control device 100 sets the duty ratio in the initial setting. The duty ratio corresponds to the brightness of each LED (each segment) of the performance display device 152. The game control device 100 sets the number of digits used in the performance display device 152 in the initial setting. In this embodiment, the number of digits used is four.

Next, the game control device 100 activates a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator) (A1014). The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator has a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) with respect to the CPU 111a based on the divided signal. It also includes a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets a RAM abnormality flag indicating an abnormality in the RAM (here, RAM111c) (A1015). Here, the flag on the premise of abnormality is once set in a predetermined register.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data (A1016). Then, if it is normal (the result of A1016 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data (A1017).

Further, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (the result of A1017 is “Y”), the game control device 100 calculates a checksum of a predetermined area (for example, a game control work area) in the RWM. The calculation process is executed (A1018), and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum and the checksum when the power is turned off match (A1019). If the checksums match (the result of A1019 is "Y"), the RAM is normal and the RAM error flag indicating the RAM error is cleared (A1020). After that, the process proceeds to step A1021.

Further, when the game control device 100 determines that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (the result of A1016 is "N" or the result of A1017 is "N"), the checksums do not match. (The result of A1019 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A1021 without clearing the RAM error flag.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (A1021). When both switches are on (the result of A1021 is "Y"), the game control device 100 shifts to the setting variable state (setting change mode), and executes the process during the probability setting change in steps A1027-A1037. ..

When at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1021 is "N"), the game control device 100 sets a RAM abnormality flag indicating an abnormality in the RAM (here, RAM111c). It is determined whether or not it has been done (A1022). When the RAM abnormality flag is not set (the result of A1022 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (A1023). When the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1023 is "N"), the process of confirming the probability setting in step A1031-A1037 (during the setting confirmation state or the setting confirmation mode), in step A1041-1044. The RAM initialization process (RAM clear process) or the process at the time of normal power-on (power recovery) in steps A1041, A1045, and A1046 is executed.

The game control device 100 notifies that the game control device 100 (main board, main board) has an abnormality when the probability setting changing flag is set (the result of A1023 is “Y”). An error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (A1024). The staging control device 300 that has received the command for notifying the main abnormality error notifies that there is an abnormality in the game control device 100.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 uses the driver 150 of the performance display device 152 to display the 7-segment display data (data of the error display of "E1" in FIG. 9C) when the game is stopped on the performance display device 152. Is output to (A1025). Then, the on-data of the security signal for notifying the external device (game hall internal management device (hall computer), information collecting terminal, etc.) of the abnormality is output to the external information terminal 71 (A1026). Here, even if the information regarding the jackpot remains in the RAM 111c, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the jackpot signal are maintained in the off state. After that, the processes of steps A1025 and A1026 are repeated to wait, and the setting change operation (both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are turned on) is performed again to wait for the power to be turned on. Note that while the processes of steps A1025 and A1026 are repeated to wait and wait, the interrupt remains disabled (A1001), and the timer interrupt process capable of executing the special figure 1 and 2 game process and the normal figure game process is executed. Since (Fig. 7) cannot be executed, the game (special figure variation display game, normal map variation display game) cannot be executed.

In this way, even though the setting change operation (both on operation of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112) is not executed, it is assumed that there is an abnormality when the probability setting changing flag is set. , A1024-A1026 is executed. For example, when the power is turned off and restarted while the probability setting is being changed (before the setting change is completed), the probability setting changing flag may be set even though the setting change operation has not been executed. be.

On the other hand, even when the RAM abnormality flag is set (the result of A1022 is "Y"), the game control device 100 notifies that the game control device 100 (main board) has an abnormality in the main abnormality error notification. The command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (A1024), and the 7-segment display data (data of the error display of "E1" in FIG. 9C) when the game is stopped is output to the driver 150 of the performance display device 152 (A1025). ), The on-data of the security signal is output to the external information terminal 71 in order to notify the external device of the RAM error (A1026). As described above, even when the information regarding the jackpot remains in the RAM 111c, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the jackpot signal are maintained in the off state. After that, the processes of steps A1025 and A1026 are repeated to wait.

When both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (the result of A1021 is “Y”), the game control device 100 starts the process of changing the probability setting (during the variable setting state). First, it is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is set (A1027). When the RAM error flag is set (the result of A1027 is "Y"), it is unknown whether the probability setting value is correct, so the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c is cleared. Then, after setting the initial value (for example, the minimum setting value "1") (A1028), the probability setting changing flag indicating that the probability setting is being changed is set (A1029). When the RAM error flag is not set (the result of A1027 is "N"), the probability setting changing flag is set without clearing the probability setting value (A1029). Next, the command for which the probability setting is being changed is transmitted to the staging control device 300 (staging control board) (A1030), and the process proceeds to step A1034. The effect control device 300 that has received the command for changing the probability setting notifies the display device 41 or the like that the probability setting is being changed.

In the game control device 100, at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1021 is "N"), and the RAM error flag is not set (the result of A1022 is "N"). ), And when the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1023 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is on (A1031). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1031 is "Y"), the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned off, and the processing during the probability setting confirmation (setting confirmation state) starts, and the probability Probability indicating that the setting is being confirmed Set the setting confirmation flag (A1032). Then, the command under confirmation of probability setting is transmitted to the staging control device 300 (staging control board) (A1033), and the process proceeds to step A1034. The effect control device 300 that has received the command for changing the probability setting notifies the display device 41 or the like that the probability setting is being confirmed.

After step A1030 or step A1033, the game control device 100 executes the processes of steps A1034 to A1040 as common processes during the probability setting change and the probability setting confirmation.

First, the game control device 100 saves 128 ms (predetermined time) in the security signal control timer area in order to output a security signal while the probability setting is being changed and the probability setting is being confirmed (A1034). The count of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the probability setting change / confirmation process (FIG. 8) described later, but the rest if the probability setting change or the probability setting confirmation is completed early. The count of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed by the external information editing process (A1321). The security signal is output for at least 50 ms while the probability setting is being changed and the probability setting is being confirmed.

Next, the game control device 100 permits interrupts (A1035). As a result, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 7) can be executed. Then, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is off (A1036). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1036 is "N"), it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred (A1037). If no power failure has occurred (the result of A1037 is "N"), the process returns to step A1036. On the other hand, when a power failure has occurred (the result of A1037 is "Y"), the process at the time of the power failure in steps A1055-A1061 is executed.

In this way, as long as the setting key switch 93 is on and a power failure has not occurred, it is possible to confirm the setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode) in which the probability setting value can be changed, or the probability setting value. The setting confirmation status (setting confirmation mode) is continued.

On the other hand, when the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A1036 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prohibits interrupts (A1038), and issues a command to end the notification to the effect control device 300 (effect control board). (A1039). The effect control device 300 that has received the command to end the notification ends the notification that the probability setting is being confirmed or the probability setting is being changed.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set, that is, whether or not the probability setting is being changed so far (A1040). When the probability setting changing flag is set (the result of A1040 is "Y"), that is, when the probability setting is being changed so far, the RAM initialization process (described later) of step A1042-A1044 is executed. do. On the other hand, when the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1040 is "N"), that is, when the probability setting is being confirmed so far, when the power is turned on after step A1045 (when the power is restored). Perform the normal processing of.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the RAM initialization switch 112 is on when the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A1031 is “N”) (A1041). When the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (the result of A1041 is “Y”), the RAM area other than the probability set value area for storing the probability set value is cleared to 0 in the RAM 111c (A1042). That is, the game information stored in the RAM 111c is cleared to 0 except for the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area. Further, the above-mentioned probability setting changing flag is also cleared here. Further, in addition to the probability setting value area, a configuration that does not clear the stack area or an unused area, or a configuration that does not clear the work area and the stack area related to the performance information and its display (performance display) is also possible. .. The performance information is derived based on the number of prize balls obtained by winning, for example, the ball ejection rate, the base value (the ball ejection rate in the normal gaming state), the bonus ratio, the number of ejected balls, and the like. be.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1043). Then, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the staging control device 300 (staging control board) (A1044), and the process proceeds to step A1047.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1041 is “N”), both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off, so that the normal power supply is used. The process at the time of turning on (when the power is restored) is started, and the power failure restoration process is executed (A1045). For example, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery (power recovery) is saved in the area to be initialized. In addition, the above-mentioned probability setting confirmation flag is also cleared here. Next, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game processing described later is transmitted to the staging control device 300 (staging control board) (A1046), and step A1047. Move to the processing of.

The command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1044 and the command at the time of recovery from a power failure transmitted in the process of step A1046 include a model designation command indicating the type of the game machine and the hold of special figures 1 and 2. Ornament special figure 1 indicating the number Hold number command and decoration special figure 2 Hold number command, probability information command indicating the presence or absence of a probability state (high probability state or low probability state) or time saving state, special figure change in a predetermined production mode It includes a production count information command that indicates the number of times the display game has been executed, and a power failure recovery command that indicates that the power has been turned on.

Further, the command at the time of RAM initialization and the command at the time of power failure recovery include a setting value information command (probability setting value information command) indicating setting value information which is information of the probability setting value (setting value) of the gaming machine 10. Is done. The game control device 100 only needs to transmit the set value information command to the effect control device 300 only once when the power is restored (turned on), and thereafter, the effect control device 300 refers to the set value information stored by itself. You can control the production.

The RAM initialization command also includes a RAM initialization command (RAM clear command). The staging control device 300 that has received the RAM initialization command displays, for example, a customer waiting demo on the display device 41, and notifies 30 of the RAM initialization (RAM clear) by the sound of the LED and the speaker of the board decoration device 46 and the like. Do it for a second. Further, the command at the time of power failure recovery includes a screen designation command for designating the display contents of the screen of the display device 41. The screen-designated command is a customer-waiting demo command for both Special Figures 1 and 2 during normal processing (when neither fluctuating nor hitting), and is a recovery screen command otherwise.

After step A1044 or step A1046, the game control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1047). Specifically, the CPU 111a sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. In addition, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set.

The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the extracted random number bits (arrangement before the upper bit transposition) by exchanging them in a predetermined order and storing them as different bit arrangements (arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that determines.

In the present embodiment, by exchanging the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be enhanced. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

After that, the game control device 100 extracts the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of turning on the power, and corresponds to various initial value random numbers (big hit symbol random numbers for determining the jackpot symbol). Initial value (big hit symbol initial value random number), small hit symbol random number that determines the small hit symbol (small hit symbol initial value random number), initial value of the hit random number that determines the hit of the normal figure (hit initial value random number) , The initial value of the fall lottery random number used in the fall lottery (fall lottery initial value random number), etc.) is saved in a predetermined area of the RWM (A1048), and interruption is permitted (A1049). In the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in the present embodiment, the initial value of the soft random number register is configured to change each time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the start value (initial value) of various initial random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, and it can be difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes an initial value random number update process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers (A1050). Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the fall lottery random number are configured to be generated by using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. There is. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than the operating clock of the CPU, and the jackpot symbol random number, hit random number, and fall lottery random number are timer interrupts that are processing units of the program. It is a "slow counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) that has the same cycle as the processing.

In addition, for big hit symbol random numbers, hit symbol random numbers, and fall lottery random numbers, a so-called "initial value change method" is adopted in which the start value is changed using each initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number makes a round. ing. It should be noted that each random number may be a counter-type update by +1 or 1, or a random-type update in which all the values in the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by the hardware, and the jackpot symbol random number, the hit random number, and the fall lottery random number are random numbers updated by the hardware and software.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prohibits interrupts (A1051) and executes a performance display editing process for editing performance information and its display (performance display) (A1052). Here, the performance information (such as the accessory ratio and the ball output rate) may be calculated. Further, when the RAM error flag is set in the register, the work area and the stack area related to the performance information and its display (performance display) may be cleared (if not cleared in step A1042). After that, interrupts are permitted (A1053). As a result, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 7) can be executed.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not a power failure has occurred (A1054). If no power failure has occurred (result of A1054 is “N”), the process returns to step A1050. As a result, the process of step A1050-A1054 is repeated until a power failure occurs.

When a power failure occurs (the result of A1054 is "Y"), the game control device 100 starts processing at the time of a power failure, temporarily disables interrupts (A1055), and outputs off-data to all output ports (A1055). 1056). After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (A1057), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (A1058). Further, a checksum calculation process for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off is executed (A1059), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1060). Finally, a process for prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1061), and the machine waits until the power of the gaming machine is turned off.

In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing (interrupt processing program). The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the timer interrupt process is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the game control device 100 first designates the register bank 1 as the register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM start address in the predetermined register (A1302). By switching from the register bank 0 used in the main processing to the register bank 1 at the start of the timer interrupt processing, it is equivalent to saving the register used in the main processing. When the timer interrupt processing is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

Next, the game control device 100 executes input from various sensors and switches, capture of signals, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (A1303). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed based on the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting checking flag (A1304). When the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed (the result of A1304 is "Y"), the probability setting change / confirmation process for changing or confirming the probability setting value is executed (A1305).

When the game control device 100 is neither changing the probability setting nor confirming the probability setting (the result of A1304 is "N"), the game control device 100 is based on the output data set in various processes, such as a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 38b, 39b). Output processing for performing actuator drive control and the like is executed (A1306). When a launch prohibition signal is output in the process of step A1005 in the main process, the launch permission signal is output by performing this output process, and the launch permission signal can be set to the permitted state.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a payout command transmission process (A1307) for outputting commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, and further, a random number update process 1 (A1308) and a random number update. Process 2 (A1309) is executed. After that, monitoring whether there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the lower winning opening switch 38a, and the upper winning opening switch 39a, and monitoring the error. (A1310), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process for performing (whether the front frame or the glass frame is opened, etc.) is executed.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not abnormal discharge of the game ball is occurring at the large winning opening (A1311). When the abnormal discharge occurring flag is set by the abnormal discharge monitoring process (A1320) described later, it can be determined that the abnormal discharge is occurring. When the abnormal discharge is occurring (the result of A1311 is "Y"), the processes after step A1317 are executed.

The game control device 100 performs a start port switch monitoring process for monitoring the winning of the start port by the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a when the abnormal discharge is not occurring (the result of A1311 is “N”). Execute (A1312). Subsequently, the special figure 1 game process for processing the special figure 1 variable display game is executed (A1313), and then the special figure 2 game process for performing the special figure 2 variable display game is executed (A1314). The details of the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a normal map game process that performs a process related to the normal map variation display game (A1315). A segment LED editing process is executed (A1316), which is provided in the gaming machine 10 and drives a segment LED for displaying a special figure variation game and various information related to the game so as to display desired contents (A1316).

Further, the game control device 100 executes a magnet fraud monitoring process of checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 to determine whether or not there is an abnormality (A1317). Further, a radio wave fraud monitoring process (board radio wave fraud monitoring process) for checking the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board and determining whether or not there is an abnormality is executed (A1318).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a vibration fraud monitoring process for monitoring fraud due to vibration based on the input from the vibration sensor 65 (A1319). Next, an abnormal discharge monitoring process for monitoring abnormal discharge from the large winning opening is executed (A1320). In the abnormal discharge monitoring process, the special variable winning device 38, 39 has a large winning opening switch 43 (lower winning opening switch 38a, upper winning opening switch 39a), a specific area switch 72 (V winning opening switch), and a remaining ball ejection port. Based on the input from the switch 73, the abnormal discharge of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 is monitored, and when the abnormal discharge occurs, the abnormal discharge occurring flag is set. The game ball that has passed through the large winning opening switch 43 of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 passes through the specific area switch 72 (V winning opening switch) or the remaining ball ejection port switch 73 and is discharged.

Next, the game control device 100 executes an external information editing process for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer (A1321). Then, the performance display monitor control process for controlling the display of the performance display device 152 is executed (A1322). After that, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

When the timer interrupt process returns, the interrupt disabled state is restored and the register bank specification is automatically restored. However, depending on the CPU used, interrupts are permitted after the external information editing process. Processing or processing to return the designation of the register bank to register bank 0 may be performed.

[Probability setting change / confirmation process]
Next, the details of the probability setting change / confirmation process (A1305) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the probability setting change / confirmation process. In the probability setting change / confirmation process, the probability setting value can be changed or confirmed.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the probability set value is within the normal range (A2401). The probability set value here is stored in the probability set value area of the RAM 111c.

When the probability set value is within the normal range (the result of A2401 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets the probability set value display data corresponding to the probability set value (A2402), and the performance display device 152. Is output via the driver 150 (A2404). When the probability setting value is not within the normal range (the result of A2401 is "N"), the extinguishing data is set as the probability setting value display data (A2403), and the data is output to the performance display device 152 via the driver 150 (A2404). ).

Here, the probability set value display data is display probability set value data displayed on the performance display device 152, and is stored in the probability set value display data area. In addition, in order to prevent confusion among people involved in the hall, if the probability setting values are different but the same jackpot probability (and small hit probability), the display probability setting value is associated with the jackpot probability (and small hit probability). May be the same. That is, the same display probability setting value may mean the same big hit probability (and small hit probability).

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the security signal control timer is not 0 (A2405). The security signal control timer is 128 ms (predetermined time) set in step A1034. Subsequently, the on-data of the security signal for notifying the external device (game hall internal management device (hall computer) or the like) of the abnormality is output to the external information terminal 71 (A1026). Here, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the jackpot signal are maintained in the off state.

After that, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (A2407). When the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A2407 is "N"), that is, when the probability setting is being confirmed, the probability setting change / confirmation process is terminated without doing anything.

The game control device 100 is the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on when the probability setting changing flag is set (the result of A2407 is "Y"), that is, when the probability setting is being changed. Whether or not it is determined (A2408). When it is the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (the result of A2408 is "Y"), the probability setting change / confirmation process is terminated. This is to prevent a situation in which the probability set value is unintentionally updated when the RAM initialization switch 112 is held down.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input of the RAM initialization switch 112 when it is not the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (the result of A2408 is “N”) (A2409). When there is no input of the RAM initialization switch (the result of A2409 is "N"), the probability setting change / confirmation process is terminated.

When the game control device 100 has an input of the RAM initialization switch 112 (the result of A2409 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the work set value in the work set value area (in the RAM 111c or the register) in the range of 0 to 5. Along with updating by +1 the probability setting values 1 to 6 in the probability setting value area are updated by +1 according to the work setting value (A2410). As a result, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is updated by 1 each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated. After that, the probability setting change / confirmation process is terminated. In the work setting value area (RAM111c or register) for storing the work setting value when the setting change mode is entered, the value corresponding to the probability setting value read from the probability setting value area (1 from the probability setting value). The subtracted value) may be stored.

In the above, every time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is directly updated in response to the update of the work setting value, but the work setting value of the RAM 111c is updated. The probability setting value (work setting value) during setting change is stored in the area, and when the setting key switch 93 is turned off and the setting change work is completed (the result of A1036 is "Y"), the work setting The value corresponding to the working setting value in the value area may be stored in the probability setting value area for the first time. By doing so, when a power failure occurs during the setting change (the result of A1037 is "Y"), the probability setting value used for game control, effect control, etc. (probability setting stored in the probability setting value area) is set. It is possible to prevent the situation where the value) is changed by an unintended value.

[Display example on a performance display device]
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a display example of the performance display device 152. The performance display device 152 is a 4-digit 7-segment type (8-segment type including dot Dp) display, but each digit of the performance display device 152 is an 8-segment a, b, c, d, e, It consists of f, g and Dp.

In the example of FIG. 9A, while the probability setting is being changed, a lighting display of "SET" is displayed in the digits 1 to 3 to indicate that the setting is being changed. On the other hand, in the digit 0, the display probability setting value is, for example, "1" to "6" corresponding to the work setting value 0 to 5 which is switched every time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated while the probability setting is changed. It switches and is lit up.

In the example of FIG. 9B, when the probability setting value is not within the normal range and is abnormal (the result of A2401 is “N”), the extinguishing data is set as the probability setting value display data (A2403), and the digit 0. Turns off. In the digits 1 to 3, the display of "SET" indicating that the setting is being changed is not turned off.

In the example of FIG. 9C, when the RAM is abnormal when the power is turned on (the result of A1022 is "Y"), or when the power is turned off and restarted while the probability setting is being changed (before the setting change is completed). (The result of A1023 is "Y"), and the 7-segment display data error display "E1" when the game is stopped is lit and displayed in digits 1 and 2 (A1024).

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (A1312) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the start port switch monitoring process.

First, the game control device 100 prepares a starting port 1 winning monitoring table (A2701) for monitoring the winning of the first starting winning opening 36 (starting port 1), and acquires a hard random number as a jackpot random number. Is executed (A2702). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a start opening prize in the first start winning opening 36 (A2703). Then, if there is no starting opening prize (the result of A2703 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2709.

When the game control device 100 receives a start opening prize in the first start winning opening 36 (the result of A2703 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the game is in the normal gaming state (A2704). Special figure low probability & no time reduction medium (the probability of big hit is low probability state and there is no time reduction (state without Fuden support)), and special figure 1 game processing number and special figure 2 game described later. If both processing numbers are 2 or less, it can be determined that the game is in a normal gaming state. If the special figure low probability & no time reduction flag is set in the special figure game mode flag area, it can be determined that the special figure low probability & no time reduction is in progress. Then, when the normal gaming state (the result of A2704 is “Y”), the process proceeds to the process of step A2707.

When the game control device 100 is in a state where the probability of occurrence of a big hit is not a low probability state (when it is in a high probability state) or when there is a time reduction (a state where there is a general electric support) (the result of A2704 is "N"). A right-handed instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A2705), and an effect command setting process is executed (A2706). As a result, the staging control device 300 displays the right-handed instruction display for instructing right-handed as a warning when there is a starter winning to the first starting winning opening 36 in the special figure high probability state or the time saving state. Can be displayed on. In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table (A2707) for setting the information of holding by winning the first start winning opening 36 (starting opening 1), and executes the special drawing start opening switch common process (A2708). ).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a starting port 2 winning monitoring table (A2709) for monitoring the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting opening 2), and sets a hard random number as a big hit random number. The hard random number acquisition process to be acquired is executed (A2710). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a start opening winning to the normal variable winning device 37 (A2711). If there is no start opening prize (the result of A2711 is "N"), the start opening switch monitoring process is terminated.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the normal variable winning device 37 is operating (during normal electric operation) when there is a start opening winning to the normal variable winning device 37 (the result of A2711 is "Y"). Judgment (A2712). When the normal variable winning device 37 is not operating (the result of A2712 is "N"), it is determined whether or not fraud (Public electric fraud) against the normal variable winning device 37 is occurring (A2713). When the number of fraudulent winnings to the ordinary variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraud occurrence determinations (for example, 5 or more), it can be determined that a general electric fraud is occurring. If the normal variable winning device 37 is being fraudulent (the result of A2713 is "Y"), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated.

When the game control device 100 is not fraudulent with the normal variable winning device 37 (the result of A2713 is "N"), the game control device 100 sets a table for setting the information of the hold due to the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 2). Preparation (A2714) is performed, the special start port switch common process is executed (A2715), and the start port switch monitoring process is terminated.

When the game control device 100 is fraudulent with respect to the normal variable winning device 37 (the result of A2712 is “Y”), the game control device 100 does not execute the process of step A2713, but executes the processes of steps A2714 and A2715.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special start port switch common process (A2708, A2715) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a procedure of common processing for the special drawing start port switch. The special figure start port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each of the inputs of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a.

First, the game control device 100 outputs information regarding the number of winnings to the monitoring target start port switch among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a to the external management device of the game machine 10. The start port signal output number of times is loaded (A2901), the loaded value is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether or not the output number of times overflows (A2903). When the number of outputs does not overflow (the result of A2903 is "N"), the updated value is saved in the start port signal output count area of the RWM (A2904), and the process proceeds to step A2905. On the other hand, when the number of output times overflows (the result of A2903 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A2905. In the present embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the start port signal output frequency region. Then, when the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is configured to determine that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, in the game control device 100, among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, whether or not the number of special figure reservations (starting memory number) to be updated corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored is less than the upper limit value. (A2905). If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is "N"), the special figure start port switch common processing is terminated. If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is "Y"), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (the number of special figure 1 hold or the number of special figure 2 hold) is updated by +1. Then (A2906), the target start opening winning flag is saved (A2907).

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the start port switch to be monitored and the random number storage area corresponding to the number of reserved special figures (A2908), and stores the jackpot random number prepared in step A2702 in the RWM jackpot random number. Save to the area (A2909). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (A2910), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2911).

After that, the game control device 100 extracts and prepares a fall lottery random number for drawing a fall from a high probability state to a low probability state of the jackpot probability of the special figure (A2912), and stores the fall lottery random number. Save to the area (A2913).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the prize is given to the normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 2) (A2914). If the prize is not won in the normal variable winning device 37 (the result of A2914 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2917. On the other hand, when the winning is to the starting winning opening 36 (the result of A2914 is "Y"), the small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (A2915), and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of RWM (A2916). ).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the variation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (A2917), and executes the special figure reservation information determination process (A2918). Then, a start port switch to be monitored and a decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure hold number are prepared as effect commands (A2919), and the effect command setting process (A2920) is executed to be common to the special figure start port switch. End the process. The decorative special figure hold number command is a decorative special figure 1 hold number command at the start port 1 switch 36a, and is a decorative special figure 2 hold number command at the start port 2 switch 37a.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the start winning opening 36 and the starting winning area of the normal variable winning device 37, and becomes the execution right of the variable display game. It serves as a start storage means for storing a predetermined number as a start memory up to an upper limit. Further, the start storage means (game control device 100) uses various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening (starting winning opening 36) as the first starting storage up to a predetermined number. It is stored, and various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) are stored as the second starting memory up to a predetermined number.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination process (A2918) in the above-mentioned special figure start port switch common process will be described. 12A and 12B are flowcharts showing the procedures of the first half and the second half of the special figure reservation information determination process (look-ahead process, pre-determination process). The special figure reservation information determination process is executed for the special figure 1 and 2 start memory generated based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the jackpot is in progress (during a special game state) (A3001). When the big hit is in progress (the result of A3001 is "Y"), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated. When it is not a big hit (the result of A3001 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the player has won the first starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A3002). The look-ahead process (preliminary determination process) is executed when the winning is to the starting opening 1 (the result of A3002 is "Y"), that is, when the winning is to the first starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1). Therefore, the process proceeds to the process after step A3004.

If the game control device 100 does not win the starting port 1 (the result of A3002 is "N"), is the probability of occurrence of a big hit a low probability state and a state without time reduction (a state without general electric support)? It is determined whether or not, that is, whether or not the special figure has a low probability and no time reduction (normal gaming state) (A3003). When the special figure low probability & no time reduction is in progress (the result of A3003 is "Y"), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated. That is, in the case of winning the normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 2) in the normal gaming state, the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated without executing the look-ahead process (preliminary determination process). In the normal game state, as will be described later, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game often fluctuates for a long time (long fluctuation) and is forcibly terminated with a disengagement result. Do not execute.

The game control device 100 is a normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 2) when the special figure is low probability & no time reduction (the result of A3003 is "N"), that is, in a state other than the normal game state (time reduction state or probability change state). ), In order to execute the look-ahead process (preliminary determination process), the process proceeds to the process of step A3004 or later.

Then, the game control device 100 starts a look-ahead process (preliminary determination process), and determines whether or not the probability of occurrence of a big hit is in a high probability state, that is, whether or not it is in a special figure high probability (A3004). .. When the special figure high probability flag (in this embodiment, the special figure high probability & the time saving flag) is set in the special figure game mode flag area, it can be determined that the special figure high probability is in progress. When the special figure is in high probability (the result of A3004 is "Y"), it is determined whether the fall lottery random number prepared in step A2912 is within the judgment value range of the fall winning (A3005), and the look-ahead fall lottery corresponding to the judgment result is determined. An information command is prepared as an effect command (A3006), and an effect command setting process is performed (A3007). Next, the game control device 100 prepares a low-probability determination flag for performing a look-ahead jackpot determination in a low-probability state (A3008). If the special figure is not in high probability (the result of A3004 is "N"), there is no fall from the high probability state to the low probability state in the first place. Move to the processing of A3008.

After that, the game control device 100 executes the look-ahead jackpot determination process described later based on the jackpot random number prepared in step A2909 (A3009), and determines whether or not the determination result of the look-ahead jackpot determination process is a jackpot (A3010). ). When the determination result is a big hit (the result of A3010 is "Y"), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start port switch (start port 1 switch 36a or start port 2 switch 37a) is set (A3011). , The stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared jackpot symbol random number is acquired (A3012), and the process proceeds to step A3019.

When the determination result of the look-ahead jackpot determination process is out of order (the result of A3010 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the prize is won in the normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 2). (A3013). When a prize is won in the starting port 2 (the result of A3013 is "Y"), a small hit can occur in the special figure 2 variable display game executed by winning the starting port 2, so a look-ahead regarding the small hit is possible. As a process, a small hit determination process described later is executed (A3014), and it is determined whether or not the determination result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (A3015). Then, when the determination result is a small hit (the result of A3015 is "Y"), the small hit symbol random number check table is set (A3016), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared small hit symbol random number is acquired (). A3017), the process proceeds to step A3019.

When the game control device 100 does not win a prize in the starting port 2 (the result of A3013 is "N"), since a small hit cannot be generated in the special figure 1 variation display game, the stop symbol information of the loss is set (A3018). ). That is, when the determination result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the stop symbol information of the deviation is set. Further, when the judgment result is not a small hit (the result of A3015 is "N"), that is, when the judgment result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the stop symbol information of the deviation is set. (A3018). After that, the process proceeds to step A3019.

After steps A3012, A3017, and A3018, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol information in the symbol information area (A3019). The stop symbol information in the symbol information area is also used in the variation pattern setting process (A3038) described later. Then, a look-ahead stop symbol command (low probability) for low probability corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information is prepared as an effect command (A3020), and the effect command setting process is executed (A3021).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a high-probability determination flag for performing a look-ahead jackpot determination in a high-probability state (A3022), and executes the process of A3023-A3032 in the same manner as A3009-A3018. First, the look-ahead jackpot determination process described later is executed (A3023), and it is determined whether or not the determination result of the look-ahead jackpot determination process is a jackpot (A3024). When the determination result is a big hit (the result of A3024 is "Y"), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start port switch (start port 1 switch 36a or start port 2 switch 37a) is set (A3025). , The stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared jackpot symbol random number is acquired (A3026), and the process proceeds to step A3033.

When the determination result of the look-ahead jackpot determination process is out of order (the result of A3024 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the prize is won in the normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 2). (A3027). When a prize is won in the starting port 2 (the result of A3027 is "Y"), a small hit can occur in the special figure 2 variable display game executed by winning the starting port 2, so a look-ahead regarding the small hit is possible. As a process, a small hit determination process described later is executed (A3028), and it is determined whether or not the determination result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (A3029). Then, when the determination result is a small hit (the result of A3029 is "Y"), the small hit symbol random number check table is set (A3030), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared small hit symbol random number is acquired (). A3031), the process proceeds to step A3033.

When the game control device 100 does not win a prize in the starting port 2 (the result of A3027 is "N"), since a small hit cannot be generated in the special figure 1 variable display game, the stop symbol information of the loss is set (A3032). ). That is, when the determination result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the stop symbol information of the deviation is set. Further, when the judgment result is not a small hit (the result of A3029 is "N"), that is, when the judgment result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the stop symbol information of the deviation is set. (A3032). After that, the process proceeds to step A3033.

After steps A3026, A3031, and A3032, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure is in high probability (A3033). When the special figure is in high probability (the result of A3033 is "Y"), the stop symbol information is overwritten and saved in the symbol information area (A3034), and the process proceeds to step A3035. The stop symbol information in the symbol information area is also used in the variation pattern setting process (A3038) described later. When the special figure is not in high probability (the result of A3033 is "N"), the process proceeds to the process of step A3035 without overwriting the stop symbol information in the symbol information area.

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a look-ahead stop symbol command (high probability) for high probability corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information as an effect command (A3035), and executes the effect command setting process (A3035). A3036).

Subsequently, the special figure information setting process for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is executed (A3037), and the variation pattern setting process for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is executed as a look-ahead. (A3038). Then, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number indicating the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared as an effect command (A3039), the effect command setting process is executed (A3040), and the special figure hold information determination process is performed. finish.

The effect control device 300 receives both the look-ahead stop symbol command (low probability) and the look-ahead stop symbol command (high probability), but if the jackpot probability at the time of receiving is a low probability state, the look-ahead stop symbol command ( (Low probability) is used to execute look-ahead symbol command processing (Fig. 51), and if the jackpot probability when received is in a high probability state, look-ahead symbol command processing (high probability) is used to perform look-ahead symbol command processing. (FIG. 51) may be executed.

[Look-ahead jackpot judgment processing]
Next, the details of the look-ahead jackpot determination process (A3009, A3023) in the special figure hold information determination process will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the look-ahead jackpot determination process.

The game control device 100 first sets a lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value (A3101), and determines whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A3102). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit.

When the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A3102 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets the determination result to be off (other than the jackpot) (A3107), and performs the look-ahead jackpot determination process. finish.

Further, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A3102 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the determination flag is a high probability determination flag (A3103). Then, when the determination flag is a high probability determination flag (the result of A3103 is "Y"), the upper limit determination value in the high probability corresponding to the probability setting value is set (A3104). On the other hand, when the judgment flag is not the high probability judgment flag (when the judgment flag is the low probability judgment flag) (the result of A3103 is "N"), the upper limit judgment value in the low probability corresponding to the probability setting value is set (A3105). ).

When the upper limit determination value of the value of the jackpot random number is set, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (A3106). When the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (the result of A3106 is "Y"), a deviation (other than the jackpot) is set as the determination result (A3107). On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (the result of A3106 is "N"), the jackpot is set as the determination result (A3108). When the determination result is set, the look-ahead jackpot determination process ends.

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 game processing (A1313) in the timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 game processing.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 1 variation display game is being interrupted is set (A3201).

When the special figure 1 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted is not set (the result of A3201 is "N"), the game control device 100 is a big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game. It is determined whether or not the player is in a state or a small hit state (A3202). Special Figure 2 When neither the big hit state nor the small hit state of the variable display game (the result of A3202 is "N"), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is executed (A3203). In the large winning opening switch monitoring process, the game ball in the lower large winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the upper large winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. Monitor detection. Then, the specific area switch specific area switch monitoring process for monitoring the input from the specific area switch 72 is executed (A3204).

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 (subtracts only 1) if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0 (A3205). Special figure 1 The game processing timer is clocked by the interrupt cycle (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing by updating -1. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. In the case of the big hit medium state or the small hit state of the special figure 2 variation display game (the result of A3202 is “Y”), the process of step A3205 is performed without the process of steps A3203 and A3204. Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (A3206). Special figure 1 When the game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A3206 is “N”), the process proceeds to the process of step A3217.

When the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3206 is "Y"), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the game control device 100 is assigned to the special figure 1 game processing number. A special figure 1 game sequence branch table referred to for branching to the corresponding process is set in the register (A3207). Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number is acquired by using the special figure 1 game sequence branch table (A3208). Subsequently, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure 1 game processing number, and the game branch processing according to the special figure 1 game processing number is executed (A3209).

When the game processing number is "0" in step A3209, the game control device 100 monitors the variation start of the special figure 1 variation display game, sets the variation start of the special figure 1 variation display game, and sets the effect. In addition, special figure 1 normal processing for setting information necessary for performing special figure 1 changing processing is executed (A3210). The details of the special drawing 1 normal processing will be described later in FIG.

When the game processing number is "1" in step A3209, the game control device 100 sets the stop display time of the special figure 1 and sets the information necessary for performing the processing during the display of the special figure 1. Special Figure 1 Performing variable processing is executed (A3211). The details of the processing during the change in FIG. 1 will be described later with reference to FIG. 35.

When the game processing number is "2" in step A3209, the game control device 100 sets a jackpot fanfare command according to the type of jackpot if the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a jackpot. The special figure 1 display processing for setting the fanfare time according to the big winning opening opening pattern of each big hit, setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, and the like is executed (A3212). The details of the processing during display of Special Figure 1 will be described later with reference to FIG. 37.

When the game processing number is "3" in step A3209, the game control device 100 sets the opening time of the big winning opening, updates the number of opening times, and performs the processing during the opening of the big winning opening. The fanfare / interval processing for setting and the like is executed (A3213). The details of the fanfare / interval processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 39.

When the game processing number is "4" in step A3209, the game control device 100 sets an interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting an ending command if it is the final round. The processing during the opening of the large winning opening is executed (A3214), in which information necessary for processing the remaining balls of the large winning opening is set.

When the game processing number is "5" in step A3209, the game control device 100 performs a process of setting an interval time and an ending time, a process of setting information necessary for performing a big hit end process, and the like. The mouth residual ball treatment is executed (A3215).

When the game processing number is "6" in step A3209, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 2 game wait time value (described later), and special figure 1 information necessary for executing normal processing. (A3216), the special figure 1 big hit end process for setting and the like is executed. The details of the special figure 1 big hit end process will be described later in FIG. 40.

When the processing based on the special figure 1 game processing number is completed, the game control device 100 prepares the special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (A3217), and then displays the special figure 1. The symbol variation control process related to the device 51 is executed (A3218), the lever solenoid control process for controlling the lever solenoid 86b is executed (A3219), and the special figure 1 game process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the special figure 1 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted is set (the result of A3201 is “Y”), the game control device 100 processes the steps A3202 to A3216. After preparing the special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (A3217), the symbol fluctuation control process related to the special figure 1 display 51 is executed (A3218). , The lever solenoid control process for controlling the lever solenoid 86b is executed (A3219), and the special figure 1 game process is terminated. In this way, when the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, the time counting (update) of the variable time timer (special figure 1 game processing timer) for measuring the variable time is stopped. It should be noted that, by the symbol variation control process, the variation of the special symbol itself may apparently continue on the special figure 1 display 51.

[Special Figure 2 Game Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 game processing (A1314) in the timer interrupt processing will be described. 15A and 15B are flowcharts showing the procedures of the first half and the second half of the special figure 2 game processing.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is in the jackpot state (A3301). Special Figure 1 When the variable display game is not in the jackpot state (the result of A3301 is “N”), the jackpot switch monitoring process is executed (A3302). In the large winning opening switch monitoring process, the game ball in the lower large winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the upper large winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. Monitor detection. Then, the specific area switch monitoring process for monitoring the input from the specific area switch 72 is executed (A3303).

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 (subtracts only 1) if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (A3304). Special figure 2 The game processing timer is clocked by the interrupt cycle (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing by updating -1. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0.

When the game control device 100 is in the jackpot state of the special figure 1 variation display game (the result of A3301 is “Y”), the game control device 100 performs the process of step A3304 without performing the processes of steps A3302 and A3303.

Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (A3305). Special figure 2 When the game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A3305 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A3323.

When the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3305 is “Y”), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the game control device 100 is of the special figure 2 game processing timer. It is determined whether or not the number of repetitions is 0 (A3306). When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A3306 is "N"), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (A3307), and the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated. A timer value for length variation (for example, 60,000 msec (60 seconds)) is saved in the area (A3308). As will be described later, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game has long fluctuations and the fluctuation time is long (for example, 10 minutes), the fluctuation time timer cannot be set with 2 bytes. Therefore, steps A3306-A3308 A timer with a long fluctuation time for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is prepared by repeating the counting of the timer value for long fluctuations for the number of repetitions by the process of.

In the game control device 100, when the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3305 is “Y”) and the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3306 is “Y”). , The special figure 2 game sequence branch table referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is set in the register (A3309). Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is acquired by using the special figure 2 game sequence branch table (A3310). Subsequently, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure 2 game processing number, and the game branch processing according to the special figure 2 game processing number is executed (A3311).

When the game processing number is "0" in step A3311, the game control device 100 monitors the variation start of the special figure 2 variation display game, and sets the variation start of the special figure 2 variation display game and the effect setting. In addition, special figure 2 normal processing for setting information necessary for performing special figure 2 changing processing is executed (A3312). The details of the special drawing 2 normal processing will be described later in FIG.

When the game processing number is "1" in step A3311, the game control device 100 sets the stop display time of the special figure 2, sets the information necessary for performing the processing during the display of the special figure 2, and the like. Special Figure 2 Performing variable processing is executed (A3313). The details of the processing during the change in FIG. 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. 36.

When the game processing number is "2" in step A3311, the game control device 100 can set a big hit fanfare command according to the type of big hit if the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit. The special figure 2 display processing for setting the fanfare time according to the big winning opening opening pattern of each big hit, setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, and the like is executed (A3314). The details of the process during display of Special Figure 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. 38.

When the game processing number is "3" in step A3311, the game control device 100 sets the opening time of the big winning opening, updates the number of opening times, and performs the processing during the opening of the big winning opening. The fanfare / interval processing for setting and the like is executed (A3315). The fanfare / interval processing is common to that executed in the special figure 1 game processing, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 39.

When the game processing number is "4" in step A3311, the game control device 100 sets an interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting an ending command if it is the final round. The processing during the opening of the large winning opening is executed (A3316), in which information necessary for processing the remaining balls of the large winning opening is set.

When the game processing number is "5" in step A3311, the game control device 100 performs a process of setting an interval time and an ending time, a process of setting information necessary for performing a big hit end process, and the like. The mouth residual ball treatment is executed (A3317).

When the game processing number is "6" in step A3311, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 jackpot end process for setting the information necessary for executing the special figure 2 normal process (the special figure 2 jackpot end process). A3318). The details of the special figure 2 big hit end process will be described later in FIG. 41.

When the game processing number is "7" in step A3311, the game control device 100 sets the opening time of the large winning opening, updates the number of opening times, sets the information necessary for performing the small hit middle processing, and the like. (A3319). The details of the small hit fanfare process will be described later in FIG. 45.

When the game processing number is "8" in step A3311, the game control device 100 performs a process of setting a small hit end command, a small amount of information necessary for performing a small hit remaining ball process, and the like. The hit process is executed (A3320).

When the game processing number is "9" in step A3311, the game control device 100 performs a process of setting an ending time, a small amount of information necessary for performing a special figure 2 small hit end process, and the like. The hit residual ball processing is executed (A3321).

When the game processing number is "10" in step A3311, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 small hit end process for setting information necessary for executing the special figure 2 normal process. (A3322). The details of the special figure 2 small hit end process will be described later in FIG. 46.

When the processing based on the special figure 2 game processing number is completed, the game control device 100 prepares the special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (A3323), and then displays the special figure 2. The symbol variation control process related to the device 52 is executed (A3324), the lever solenoid control process for controlling the lever solenoid 86b is executed (A3325), and the special figure 2 game process is terminated.

[Special Figure 1 Normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 normal processing (A3210) in the special figure 1 game processing will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special drawing 1 normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game can start variation (A3401). Here, from the end of the big hit fluctuation of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game (during the process of displaying the special figure 2) to the end of the big hit operation (special figure 2 big hit end process). 2 From the end of the fluctuation of the small hit of the variable display game (during the process of displaying the special figure 2) to the end of the small hit operation (processing of the end of the small hit of the special figure 2), and during the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game (variation). In (middle), it is said that the special figure 1 variable display game cannot start variable.

When the special figure 1 variation display game can start variation (the result of A3401 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the left-handed instruction has been notified (A3402). If the left-handed instruction notification command has already been prepared as the effect command and transmitted to the effect control device 300, it can be determined that the left-handed instruction notification has been completed. If the left-handed instruction has been notified (the result of A3402 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A3406.

When the left-handed instruction notification has not been notified based on the left-handed instruction notification flag (the result of A3402 is "N"), the game control device 100 prepares the left-handed instruction notification command as an effect command (A3403), and sets the effect command. (A3404), and set the left-handed instruction notification flag indicating that the left-handed instruction is notified (displayed) on the display device 41 or the like (A3405).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of holdings in FIG. 1 is 0 (A3406). Special figure 1 When the number of holdings is not 0 (the result of A3406 is "N"), the fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the presence or absence of the current probability state (low probability state or high probability state) and the time saving state is prepared as an effect command. Then (A3407), the effect command setting process is executed (A3408). Subsequently, the special figure 1 variation start process for starting the special figure 1 variation display game is executed (A3409). After that, a decorative special figure hold number command (decorative special figure 1 hold number command) corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is prepared as an effect command (A3410), and the effect command setting process is executed (A3411).

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a remaining game count command corresponding to the time shortening fluctuation number, which is the number of remaining special figure fluctuation display games in the time saving state, as an effect command (A3412), and executes the effect command setting process. (A3413). The staging control device 300 that has received the remaining game count command can grasp the time reduction fluctuation count.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the information during the change of the special figure 1 in the special figure status area in the RWM (information addition) (A3414). Here, the information of the special figure 1 changing or (the special figure 1 changing + the special figure 2 changing) is set in the special figure status area. Next, the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process, which is the process for shifting to the special figure 1 changing process, is executed (A3415). In the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process, for example, the process number “1” is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area.

When the special figure 1 hold number is 0 (the result of A3406 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the game is in the normal game state (A3416). When it is in the normal gaming state (the result of A3416 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demo has been started (A3417). If the customer waiting demo has not started (the result of A3417 is "N"), the customer waiting demo in progress flag is set (A3418).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state as an effect command (A3419), and executes the effect command setting process (A3420). In this way, the effect control device that received the customer waiting demo command when the special figure 1 variable display game (main variable display game) is not being executed in the normal gaming state and the special figure 1 hold number is 0. The 300 can execute a customer waiting demo such as displaying a demo movie on the display device 41. After that, the special figure 1 normal processing number "0" is set as the special figure 1 game processing number (A3421), and the game is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area of the RWM (A3422).

[Special Figure 2 Normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 normal processing (A3312) in the special figure 2 game processing will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special drawing 2 normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game can start variation (A3501). If the special figure 2 variable display game cannot start variable (if the variable start is not possible) (the result of A3501 is "N"), the special figure 2 normal processing number "0" is set as the special figure 2 game processing number. (A3518), save in the special figure 2 game processing number area of RWM (A3519). Here, from the end of the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game (during the process of displaying the special figure 1) to the end of the jackpot operation (special figure 1 big hit end process), and During the small hit state and during execution (during fluctuation) of the special figure 2 variable display game, it is considered that the special figure 2 variable display game cannot start fluctuation.

When the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can start fluctuation (the result of A3501 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of reserved special figures 2 is 0 (A3502). Special figure 2 When the number of holdings is not 0 (the result of A3502 is "N"), a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the presence or absence of the current probability state (low probability state or high probability state) or the time saving state is prepared as an effect command. Then (A3503), the effect command setting process is executed (A3504). Subsequently, the special figure 2 variation start process for starting the special figure 2 variation display game is executed (A3505).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure hold number command (decorative special figure 2 hold number command) corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number as an effect command (A3506), and executes the effect command setting process (A3506). A3507). After that, the game control device 100 prepares a remaining game count command corresponding to the time shortening fluctuation number, which is the number of remaining special figure fluctuation display games in the time saving state, as an effect command (A3508), and executes the effect command setting process. (A3509). The staging control device 300 that has received the remaining game count command can grasp the time reduction fluctuation count.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the information during the change of the special figure 2 in the special figure status area in the RWM (information addition) (A3510). Here, the information of the special figure 2 changing or (the special figure 1 changing + the special figure 2 changing) is set in the special figure status area. Next, the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process, which is the process for shifting to the special figure 2 changing process, is executed (A3511). In the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process, for example, the process number “1” is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area.

When the special figure 2 hold number is 0 (the result of A3502 is "Y"), the game control device 100 has a special figure 2.
It is determined whether or not the special figure is in high probability or time saving, that is, whether or not it is in a probabilistic state or time saving state (A3512). When the special figure is in high probability or in a short time (the result of A3512 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demonstration has been started (A3513). If the customer waiting demo has not started (the result of A3513 is "N"), the customer waiting demo in progress flag is set (A3514).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state as an effect command (A3515), and executes the effect command setting process (A3516). In this way, when the special figure 2 variable display game (main variable display game) is not being executed in the probable change state or the time saving state and the special figure 2 hold number is 0, the effect of receiving the customer waiting demo command. The control device 300 can execute a customer waiting demo on the display device 41. After that, the special figure 2 normal processing number "0" is set as the special figure 2 game processing number (A3517), and the game is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area of the RWM (A3518).

On the other hand, when the special figure is not in high probability or in a short time (the result of A3512 is "N"), the special figure 2 normal processing number "0" is used as the special figure 2 game processing number without preparing the customer waiting demo command. (A3517) and save in the special figure 2 game processing number area of RWM (A3518). Also, even if the customer waiting demo has already started (the result of A3513 is "Y"), the special figure 2 normal processing number "0" is used as the special figure 2 game processing number without preparing the customer waiting demo command. (A3517) and save in the special figure 2 game processing number area of RWM (A3518).

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (A3409) in the special figure 1 normal processing will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing.

The game control device 100 first sets the special figure 1 information setting flag (A3601a). The special figure 1 information setting flag is used for setting fluctuation information (including distribution of look-ahead fluctuation patterns). Next, a random number is loaded from the special figure 1 fall lottery random number storage area (for the number of hold 1), prepared (A3602a), and the special figure 1 fall lottery random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (A3603a). , The fall lottery process described later is executed (A3604a). It should be noted that the reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start storage in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets the jackpot flag 1 setting process (A3605a) for setting the jackpot flag 1 deviation information and the jackpot information for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is a jackpot, and the special figure. 1 Special figure 1 Stop symbol setting process (A3606a) related to the setting of the stop symbol (symbol information), Special figure 1 Special figure 1 Information setting to set the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display game. The process (A3607a) is executed.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is set (A3608a). ). Subsequently, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (A3609a) for setting the fluctuation pattern which is the fluctuation mode in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, and the fluctuation start information setting process for setting the fluctuation start information of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (A3609a). A3610a) is executed. Then, the time reduction variation number update process for updating the time reduction variation number is executed (A3611a).

Next, the game control device 100 sets “1” as the processing number (A3612a) in order to shift to the processing during the change in the special figure 1, and saves the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A3613a). Subsequently, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (A3614a), and the signal relating to the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 (on-data of the signal during change of the special symbol 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A3615a).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the changing flag in the variation control flag area of FIG. 1 (A3616a). Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 100 msec) of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the indicator 1 of the special figure 1) is saved in the blinking control timer area of the special figure 1 (A3617a), and the symbol number area during the change of the special figure 1 is saved. The initial value of the changing symbol number (for example, 0 indicating a non-lighting symbol) is saved in (A3618a).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is a special figure low probability & no time reduction (normal game state) (A3619a). If the special figure low probability & no time reduction flag is set in the special figure game mode flag area, the probability of occurrence of a big hit is a low probability state and there is no time reduction (a state without general electric support). Figure It can be judged that the probability is low and there is no time reduction. When the special figure is low probability & no time reduction (normal game state) (the result of A3619a is "Y"), whether or not the special figure 2 is undergoing a big hit fluctuation, that is, an irregular big hit (described above). Special Figure 2 It is determined whether or not the variable display game is changing (A3620a).

When the special figure 2 is in the big hit fluctuation (the result of A3620a is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game during the fluctuation is within a predetermined time. Judgment (A3621a). Here, during the predetermined time, a specific effect (for example, SP reach effect) related to the special figure 1 variable display game is changed to another effect (for example, N reach effect or no reach effect) before the start of the special figure 1 variable display game. It is a time reserved for replacement or cancellation, and is preferably a time longer than the longest fluctuation time (for example, 196 seconds) of the special figure 1 variation display game. For example, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variation display game in the normal gaming state is 590 seconds (about 10 minutes), whereas the predetermined time is about 200 seconds (about 3 minutes).

The game control device 100 suggests the occurrence of an irregular jackpot and adjusts the effect when the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game during fluctuation is within a predetermined time (the result of A3621a is “Y”). Is set as an irregular jackpot effect adjustment flag indicating that is required (A3622a). The irregular jackpot effect adjustment flag is cleared by the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 (A5428) or the like at the end of the special figure 2 variable display game.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares an effect adjustment command for adjusting the effect as an effect command (A3623a), executes the effect command setting process (A3624a), and ends the special figure 1 variation start process. The effect adjustment command (predetermined information) also has a function of notifying the effect control device 300 of the occurrence of an irregular jackpot.

On the other hand, the game control device 100 is not in the case of low probability of special figure & no time reduction (normal game state) (result of A3619a is "N"), and when special figure 2 is not in the big hit fluctuation (result of A3620a is "N"). ), If the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game during fluctuation is longer than the predetermined time (the result of A3621a is "N"), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is terminated without preparing the effect adjustment command. ..

In this way, when the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game, which is an irregular jackpot, is within a predetermined time in the normal game state, the special figure 1 variable display game is played until the end of the special figure 2 variable display game. Each time it is started (at the start of each special figure 1 variation display game), an effect adjustment command for adjusting the effect is transmitted to the effect control device 300. That is, while the irregular jackpot effect adjustment flag is set (while it is turned on), the effect adjustment command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 each time the special figure 1 variation display game is started. Then, the effect control device 300 that has received the effect adjustment command is arranged so that the player is not surprised even if the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped by an irregular jackpot and the result (result other than the jackpot) is stopped. The content of the production can be adjusted. In addition, after the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game, which is an irregular jackpot, is within a predetermined time, the directing adjustment command is issued only once when the special figure 1 variable display game is started for the first time. The effect control device 300 may adjust the content of the effect based on the effect adjustment command received only once.

In the normal game state, the special figure 2 variation display game has a long variation (for example, 10 minutes), and when the effect adjustment command is transmitted at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game to adjust the content of the effect, the player a. There is a possibility that the player recognizes that it is a regular jackpot immediately after the start of the special figure 2 variable display game for a long time, and the interest of the game is lowered and the player stops launching the game ball by the operation handle 24. However, in the present embodiment, the effect adjustment command is not transmitted until the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, which is an irregular jackpot, reaches a predetermined time, so that the player recognizes the irregular jackpot significantly. It will be delayed and it will be possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting. The smaller the predetermined time is, the more the player recognizes the irregular jackpot immediately before the jackpot stop symbol is stopped.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (A3505) in the special figure 2 normal processing will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing.

In the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing, in steps A3601b-A3618b, the "big hit flag 1" in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (FIG. 18) is changed to the "big hit flag 2", and the "special figure 1" is changed to the "special figure 2". Since this is a replacement and the same processing as that of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing is performed, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that steps A3601b-A3618b in the special figure 2 variation start process correspond to steps A3601a-A3618a in the special figure 1 variation start process, respectively.

Next to step A3618b, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure is in high probability or time saving, that is, whether or not it is in a probabilistic state or time saving state (A3619b). If the special figure high probability & time saving flag is set in the special figure game mode flag area, it can be determined that it is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), and if the special figure low probability & time saving flag is set, it is determined. It can be determined that the time is shortened. Whether or not the special figure 1 is in the big hit fluctuation, that is, the irregular big hit (described above) when the special figure is in the high probability or the time reduction (probability change state or the time reduction state) (the result of A3619b is "Y"). Special Figure 1 It is determined whether or not the variable display game is changing (A3620a).

When the special figure 1 is changing the jackpot (the result of A3620b is "Y"), the game control device 100 notifies the effect control device 300 of the occurrence of the irregular jackpot and produces an effect adjustment command for adjusting the effect. Prepare as a command (A3621b), execute the effect command setting process (A3622b), and end the special figure 1 fluctuation start process. The effect adjustment command of step A3621b is the same as that of step A3623a. When the special figure 1 is changing the jackpot, the jackpot flag 1 and the irregular jackpot effect adjustment flag are used in combination. In this embodiment, the irregular jackpot effect adjustment flag is not set for the sake of simplicity, but it should be set. You may do it.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the special figure is not in the high probability or the time reduction (probability change state or the time reduction state) (the result of A3619b is "N"), the special figure 1 is not in the jackpot fluctuation (the result of A3620b is "". N ”), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is completed without preparing the effect adjustment command.

In this way, every time the special figure 2 variable display game is started after the start of the special figure 1 variable display game which is an irregular jackpot in the probable change state or the time saving state (at the start of each special figure 2 variable display game). ), An effect adjustment command for adjusting the effect is transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the effect control device 300 that has received the effect adjustment command is arranged so that the player is not surprised even if the decoration special figure 2 variation display game is forcibly stopped by an irregular jackpot and the result (result other than the jackpot) is stopped. The content of the production can be adjusted. It should be noted that, after the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, which is an irregular jackpot, when the special figure 2 variable display game is started for the first time, the effect adjustment command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 only once to control the effect. The device 300 may adjust the content of the effect based on the effect adjustment command received only once.

[Fall lottery process]
Next, the details of the fall lottery processing (A3604a, A3604b) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and the special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fall lottery process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the probability of occurrence of a jackpot is in a high probability state (probability variation state), that is, whether or not it is in a special figure high probability (A3701). If the special figure is not in high probability (the result of A3701 is "N"), the fall lottery process is terminated.

In the game control device 100, when the special figure is in high probability (the result of A3701 is "Y"), the value of the fall lottery random number of the target (special figure 1 or special figure 2) is less than the fall lottery lower limit determination value. Whether or not it is determined (A3702). When it is less than the lower limit determination value of the fall lottery (the result of A3702 is "Y"), the fall lottery process is terminated. When it is equal to or greater than the fall lottery lower limit determination value (the result of A3702 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the value of the target fall lottery random number is larger than the fall lottery upper limit determination value (A3703). When it is larger than the fall lottery upper limit determination value (the result of A3703 is "Y"), the fall lottery process is terminated.

When the game control device 100 is equal to or less than the fall lottery upper limit determination value (the result of A3703 is "N"), the value of the target fall lottery random number becomes a value between the fall lottery upper limit determination value and the fall lottery lower limit determination value. Therefore, the processing at the time of winning the fall lottery is started, and first, the signal regarding the high probability end is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (A3704). Here, the signals relating to the high probability end are off-data (off-signal) of 2 jackpot signals and off-data (off-signal) of 4 jackpot signals. As a result, the signal relating to the high probability termination is output as external information to the external information terminal 71 and thus to an external device (such as a hall computer).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the end of high probability & time saving in the test signal output data area (A3705). The signals related to the end of high probability & time reduction are, for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal off data, special symbol 2 high probability state signal off data, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal off data, special symbol 2 variation. This is the off-data of the time reduction status signal.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the signal related to the left-handed instruction in the test signal output data area (A3706). Then, the number without time reduction is saved in the game state display number area of the RWM (A3707). The special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area of RWM (A3708), and the fall lottery process is completed. The special figure low probability & no time reduction flag indicates that the probability of a big hit is low and there is no time reduction state (normal game state).

As described above, in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the fall lottery is executed at the start of each special figure fluctuation display game, and when the fall lottery is won, the probabilistic state (high probability state) is changed to the normal gaming state (low). The fall process (A3704-A3708) that falls to the probabilistic state) is executed.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (A3605a) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 1 setting process.

First, the game control device 100 saves the deviation information in the jackpot flag 1 area of the RWM (A3801). Subsequently, the jackpot random number is loaded and prepared from the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM (A3802). It should be noted that the reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start storage in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1). After that, the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (A3803).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 2 area (A3804). When the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (the result of A3804 is "N"), a jackpot determination process for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a jackpot is executed based on the acquired jackpot random number value (A3805). ), It is determined whether or not the result of the determination is a big hit (A3806). When the result of the determination is a big hit (the result of A3806 is "Y"), the big hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step A3801 is overwritten with the big hit information and saved (A3807), and the big hit flag 1 setting process is performed. finish. Since the jackpot flag 1 can be a jackpot only when the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (the jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area), it is possible to avoid that the jackpot flag 1 and the jackpot flag 2 are jackpots at the same time. ..

In the game control device 100, when the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (the result of A3804 is "Y"), or when the determination result of the special figure 1 variation display game is not a jackpot (the result of A3806 is "N"), the jackpot Flag 1 Ends the setting process.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 2 setting process (A3605b) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 2 setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves the deviation information in the small hit flag 2 area of the RWM (A3901), and saves the deviation information in the big hit flag 2 area of the RWM (A3902). Subsequently, the jackpot random number is loaded and prepared from the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM (A3903). It should be noted that the reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start storage in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2). After that, the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (A3904).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (A3905). When the jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (the result of A3905 is "N"), a jackpot determination process for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is a jackpot is executed based on the acquired jackpot random number value (A3906). ), It is determined whether or not the result of the determination is a big hit (A3907). When the result of the determination is a big hit (the result of A3907 is "Y"), the big hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step A3902 is overwritten with the big hit information and saved (A3908), and the big hit flag 2 setting process is performed. finish. Since the jackpot flag 2 can be a jackpot only when the jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (the jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 2 area), it is possible to avoid that the jackpot flag 1 and the jackpot flag 2 are jackpots at the same time. ..

The game control device 100 acquires when the jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (the result of A3905 is "Y") or when the determination result of the special figure 2 variation display game is not a jackpot (the result of A3907 is "N"). Based on the big hit random value, the small hit determination process for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game is a small hit is executed (A3909), and the result of the determination is determined whether or not it is a small hit (A3909). A3910). In this embodiment, the big hit random value is also used for the small hit determination (in other words, the same random number value is used for the small hit determination and the big hit determination). Special Figure 2 When the variable display game is a small hit (the result of A3910 is "Y"), the small hit flag 2 area where the loss information was saved in step A3901 is overwritten with the small hit information and saved (A3911). The jackpot flag 2 setting process is terminated. If the special figure 2 variation display game is not a small hit (the result of A3910 is "N"), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated without saving the small hit information in the small hit flag 2 area.

[Big hit judgment process]
Next, the details of the big hit determination process (A3805, A3906) in the big hit flag 1 setting process, the big hit flag 2 setting process, and the like will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot determination process. The jackpot determination process is a process common to the jackpot determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process.

The game control device 100 first sets a lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value (A4001), and determines whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A4002). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit.

When the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A4002 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets a deviation (other than the jackpot) as the determination result (A4007), and ends the jackpot determination process. do.

Further, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A4002 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure is in high probability (A4003). Then, when the special figure is in high probability (the result of A4003 is "Y"), the upper limit determination value in high probability corresponding to the probability setting value is set (A4004). On the other hand, when the special figure is not in the high probability (the result of A4003 is "N"), the upper limit determination value in the low probability corresponding to the probability setting value is set (A4005).

When the upper limit determination value of the value of the jackpot random number is set, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (A4006). When the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (the result of A4006 is "Y"), a deviation (other than the jackpot) is set as the determination result (A4007). On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (the result of A4006 is "N"), the jackpot is set as the determination result (A4008). When the determination result is set, the jackpot determination process ends.

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, the details of the small hit determination process (A3909) in the big hit flag 2 setting process and the like will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit determination process. The small hit determination process is a process common to the small hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (A4101). The small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or higher than the small hit lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. If it is equal to or less than the determination value, it is determined to be a small hit.

As a matter of course, in order to avoid that the result of the same special figure fluctuation display game is a small hit and a big hit, the range of the small hit judgment value (between the small hit lower limit judgment value and the small hit upper limit judgment value) is the above-mentioned big hit judgment. It does not overlap the range of values (between the lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value). In this embodiment, the small hit random number is not provided independently, and the big hit random number is also used for the determination of the small hit, but it is also possible to provide the original small hit random number.

When the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (the result of A4101 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets a deviation as the determination result (A4103), and ends the small hit determination process. ..

Further, in the game control device 100, if the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (the result of A4101 is "N"), whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value. (A4102). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (the result of A4102 is "Y"), the deviation is set as the determination result (A4103). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (the result of A4102 is "N"), the small hit is set as the determination result (A4104). When the determination result is set, the small hit determination process ends.

[Big hit probability, small hit probability, fall probability]
25 (a), (b), and 25 (c) are special figure variation display games determined as a result of the above-mentioned big hit determination process (FIG. 23), small hit determination process (FIG. 24), and fall lottery process (FIG. 20). It is a table exemplifying the big hit probability, the small hit probability, and the fall probability of.

In the example of FIG. 25A, the jackpot probability (high probability state) in the high probability state is the same regardless of the probability setting values 1 to 6 (settings 1 to 6). On the other hand, the jackpot probability (low probability state) in the low probability state tends to increase as the probability setting value increases (higher setting), and the larger the probability setting value, the more likely the jackpot to occur and the player It will be advantageous. As described above, only one of the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the jackpot probability in the high probability state may be configured to increase as the probability setting value increases. The jackpot probability is obtained by dividing the difference between the upper limit determination value and the lower limit determination value in FIG. 23 by the range of the value of the jackpot random number. The jackpot probability can be changed according to the probability setting value by changing the range of the lower limit determination value or the value of the jackpot random number corresponding to the probability setting value in addition to the upper limit determination value.

Further, in setting 1 and 2, setting 3 and setting 4, or setting 5 and setting 6, the jackpot probability (high probability state) and the jackpot probability (low probability state) are the same. It should be noted that the jackpot probabilities may be different from each other in all settings. Further, even if the jackpot probability is the same, the effect control device 300 can execute the effect according to each probability set value (variable effect setting process described later).

In the example of FIG. 25B, the small hit probability is constant regardless of whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state, and regardless of the probability setting value (setting). The small hit probability is obtained by dividing the difference between the small hit upper limit determination value and the small hit lower limit determination value in FIG. 24 by the range of the value of the large hit random number. As shown in FIG. 14, in the special figure 1 variable display game, small hits do not occur (small hit probability is zero). It should be noted that a configuration in which a small hit occurs in the special figure 1 variable display game is also possible.

In the example of FIG. 25 (c), the fall probability as the winning probability of the fall lottery does not depend on the probability setting value (setting), regardless of whether it is in the high probability state or the low probability state, and the special figure. 1 It is constant (1/237) regardless of whether it is a variable display game or a special figure 2 variable display game. The fall probability is obtained by dividing the difference between the fall lottery upper limit determination value and the fall lottery lower limit determination value in FIG. 20 by the range of the value of the fall lottery random number.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (A3606a) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (A4201). When the jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (the result of A4201 is "Y"), the jackpot symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (A4202). Next, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (A4203), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area of the RWM (A4204). This process selects the type of special result.

After that, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table (A4205), acquires the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4206). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display device (here, the special figure 1 display device 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Then, the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (A4207). The time reduction determination data includes information on whether or not there is a time reduction state (with or without time reduction) after the end of the big hit, and is used in the special figure 1 big hit end process and the special figure 2 big hit end process described later.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number, saves it in the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area of the RWM (A4208), and wins a large prize corresponding to the stop symbol number. The mouth opening information is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 large winning mouth opening information area of RWM (A4209). After that, the process proceeds to step A4212. This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state.

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (the result of A4201 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number at the time of the loss in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (A4210), and the loss stop symbol pattern. Is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4211). After that, the process proceeds to step A4212.

After steps A4209 and A4211, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern, and saves the decorative special figure 1 command as an effect command in the decorative special figure 1 command area (A4212). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is set.

After that, the game control device 100 executes the effect command setting process (A4213). As a result, the decorative special figure 1 command is later transmitted to the staging control device 300.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A4214), and clears the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) to 0 (A4215). ). After that, the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (A3606b) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 2 area (A4301). When the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (the result of A4301 is "Y"), the jackpot symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 2 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (A4302). Next, the special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (A4303), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area of the RWM (A4304). This process selects the type of special result.

After that, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table (A4305), acquires the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4306). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special diagram 2 display 52) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Then, the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (A4307). The time reduction determination data includes information on whether or not there is a time reduction state (with or without time reduction) after the end of the big hit, and is used in the special figure 1 big hit end process and the special figure 2 big hit end process described later.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number, saves it in the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area of the RWM (A4308), and wins a large prize corresponding to the stop symbol number. The mouth opening information is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 large winning mouth opening information area of RWM (A4309). After that, the process proceeds to step A4317. This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the result of A4301 is "N"), whether or not the small hit flag 2 is a small hit, that is, the small hit information is stored in the small hit flag 2 area. It is determined whether it is saved (A4310). When the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (the result of A4310 is "Y"), the small hit symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (A4311). Next, the special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (A4312), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (A4313). This process selects the type of specific result. Subsequently, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4314). After that, the process proceeds to step A4317.

When the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (the result of A4310 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number at the time of loss in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (A4315), and the loss stop symbol pattern. Is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4316). After that, the process proceeds to step A4317.

After steps A4309, A4314, and A4316, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern, and saves the decorative special figure 2 command as an effect command in the decorative special figure 2 command area (A4317). ). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is set.

After that, the game control device 100 executes the effect command setting process (A4318). The decorative special figure 2 command is later transmitted to the staging control device 300.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A4319), and clears the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) to 0 (A4320). ), Clear the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) to 0 (A4321). After that, the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

In this way, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of the game ball in the first start winning opening 36, and detects the game ball in the normal variable winning device 37. As a variable display game based on the above, the variable display game execution means for executing the special figure 2 variable display game. Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variable display game execution control means for controlling the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination means (game control device 100).

[Example of special figure jackpot symbol distribution]
FIG. 28 is a table illustrating the distribution of the jackpot type (big hit symbol distribution) of the special figure 1 and 2 variable display games controlled by the above-mentioned special figure 1 stop symbol setting process and special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. Is. It should be noted that the distribution of the type of jackpot is common to each setting (each probability setting value).

FIG. 28 exemplifies a table that defines the types of jackpots corresponding to the jackpot stop symbol numbers acquired in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process and the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process and the distribution rate thereof. In the example of FIG. 28, the types of jackpots are 10R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 10R normal jackpot (time reduction 100 times), which are common to the special figures 1 and 2 variable display games. In addition, a 10R normal big hit (time reduction number 0 times) may be provided.

The fractions of the 10R probable big hit, the 4R probable big hit, and the 10R normal big hit (time reduction 100 times) are 30%, 30%, and 40% in the special figure 1 variable display game, and in the special figure 2 variable display game. It differs by 50%, 10%, and 40%. The distribution rate can be changed as appropriate.

[Special Figure 1 Information Setting Process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 information setting process (A3607a) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 information setting process.

The game control device 100 first sets a variation pattern selection information table (A4401). Then, the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 1 are acquired (A4402).

Here, the first half offset data (variable distribution information 1) is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuations, and the second half offset data (variable distribution information 2) is a table pointer for distributing the second half fluctuations. The first half variation is a variation mode before the start of reach, and the second half variation is a variation mode after the reach state is reached, and corresponds to the type of reach (normal reach, special reach, etc., including no reach).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit (A4403), and when the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is not a big hit (the result of A4403 is "N"). ), The value is converted by adding the special figure 1 hold number to the first half offset data in order to distribute the first half fluctuation according to the special figure 1 hold number (A4404). Then, the process proceeds to step A4405.

When the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit (the result of A4403 is "Y"), the game control device 100 does not perform the process of step A4404, and updates and converts the first half offset data acquired in step A4402. Instead, the process proceeds to step A4405.

Then, the game control device 100 saves the first half offset data (variable distribution information 1) in the variable distribution information 1 area of the RWM (A4405), and stores the latter half offset data (variable distribution information 2) in the variable distribution of the RWM. Save in the information 2 area (A4406), and end the special figure 1 information setting process.

[Special Figure 2 Information Setting Process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 information setting process (A3607b) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 information setting process.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability of occurrence of a big hit is a low probability state and no time reduction (state without normal electric support), that is, a special figure low probability & no time reduction (normal game). It is determined whether or not the condition is (A4501). If there is no special figure low probability & no time reduction (the result of A4501 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A4505.

When the game control device 100 is not in the special figure low probability & time saving state (the result of A4501 is "N"), that is, in the time saving state or the probable change state, the special figure fluctuation display game to be started is finally shortened in time. It is determined whether or not it is a fluctuation (A4502). The time-reduced final variation is a final (for example, 100th) special figure variation display game in a time-reduced state. When the special figure variation display game to be started is the time-reduced final variation (the result of A4502 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A4506.

The game control device 100 sets a variation pattern selection information table (A4503) when the special figure variation display game to be started is not the time-reduced final variation (the result of A4502 is "N"). Then, the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 2 are acquired (A4504). As described above, the first half offset data (variable distribution information 1) is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuations, and the second half offset data (variable distribution information 2) is a table pointer for distributing the second half fluctuations. ..

On the other hand, when the special figure low probability & no time reduction is in progress (the result of A4501 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure variation display game to be started is a high probability final variation. (A4505). Here, the high-probability final fluctuation is a special figure fluctuation display game when the player wins the fall lottery (FIG. 20) and falls from the probabilistic change state (high probability state) to the normal gaming state (low probability state).

The game control device 100 determines when the special figure variation display game to be started is a high-probability final variation (the result of A4505 is "Y") or when the time-reduced final variation is (the result of A4502 is "Y"). ”), In order to secure time for notifying that the final fluctuation is made, the first half offset data and the second half offset data for the final fluctuation are set (A4506), and the process proceeds to step A4511.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit when the special figure variation display game to be started is not a high-probability final variation (the result of A4505 is "N") (the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is "N"). A4507). If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A4507 is "N"), set the first half offset data for the missed / small hit of special figure 2 at the time of low probability (A4508), and process in step A4510. Move to. When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A4507 is “Y”), the first half offset data for the big hit of the special figure 2 at the time of low probability is set (A4509). Subsequently, the latter half offset data for the long-term fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set (A4510). As a result, in the normal gaming state, the special figure 2 variable display game has a longer fluctuation (long fluctuation) than the special figure 1 variable display game.

In the probabilistic state (special figure high probability state), the latter half offset data for the long-term fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not set, so that the special figure 2 fluctuation display game has a normal fluctuation time fluctuation (long fluctuation). (Short fluctuation in comparison). As a result, in the probabilistic state (special figure high probability state), a small hit rush state in which small hits frequently occur due to the special figure 2 variable display game occurs. Since the probability state does not change in the small hit, the small hit rush state in which the small hit occurs frequently continues from the start of the probabilistic change state to the occurrence of the big hit state (until the result of the special figure variation display game becomes the big hit result). It should be noted that a configuration that enables a small hit rush state even in a short time state is also possible.

After step A4504, A4506 or A4510, the game control device 100 saves the first half offset data (variable distribution information 1) in the variable distribution information 1 area of the RWM (A4511), and saves the latter half offset data (variable distribution information 2). ) Is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area of the RWM (A4512), and the special figure 2 information setting process is completed.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (A3609a) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process.

The game control device 100 first sets a variable group address table (A4601a), acquires and prepares the address of the latter half variable group table corresponding to the variable distribution information 2 (A4602a), and prepares the variable group random number (A4602a). 1 The variation pattern random number 1 is loaded and prepared as a random number from the storage area (for the number of hold 1) (A4603a).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is out of order (A4604a). If the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is out of order (the result of A4604a is "Y"), the 2-byte distribution process based on the variation pattern random number 1 is executed (A4605a), and the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is out of order. If not (in the case of a big hit or a small hit) (the result of A4604a is "N"), the distribution process based on the variation pattern random number 1 is executed (A4606a). The 2-byte distribution process and the distribution process are processes for selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special figure 1 variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

The structure of the latter half variable group table is different for hit and miss, and the random number for distribution is 1 byte size for hit and 2 byte size for hit. The hit size is set to 1 byte size to save data capacity, but 1 byte is sufficient because the appearance rate of the hit in the special figure 1 variable display game itself is low. In the case of a hit (in the case of a big hit or a small hit), only the lower value of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is used.

After step A4605a or A4606a, the game control device 100 acquires and prepares the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of distribution (A4607a). Subsequently, the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded and prepared as a random number from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the holding number 1) of the special figure 1 (A4608a), and the distribution process based on the variation pattern random number 2 is executed (A4609a). .. Then, the latter half variable number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the latter half variable number area (A4610a). The distribution process here is a process for selecting the latter half variation number (second half variation pattern) of the special figure 1 variation display game from the latter half variation selection table (second half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 2.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half fluctuation group table (A4611a), and calculates the table selection pointer based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the second half fluctuation number (A4612a). Subsequently, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (A4613a). Further, the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded and prepared as a random number from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the reserved number 1) of the special figure 1 (A4614a), and the distribution process based on the variation pattern random number 3 is executed (A4615a). The distribution process here is a process for selecting the first half variation number (first half variation pattern) of the special figure 1 variation display game from the first half variation selection table (first half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 3. be.

Further, the game control device 100 acquires the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution, saves it in the first half variation number area (A4616a), and ends the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process.

By the above processing, the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is an execution mode of the game, from among a plurality of variations.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (A3609b) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process.

The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process replaces "special figure 1" with "special figure 2" in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (FIG. 31), and is the same process as the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process. Therefore, detailed description will be omitted. Note that steps A4601b-A4616b in the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process correspond to steps A4601a-A4616a in the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process, respectively.

By the above processing, the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is an execution mode of the game, from among a plurality of variations.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation start information setting processing (A3610a, A3610b) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and the special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fluctuation start information setting process.

The game control device 100 first clears the random number storage area (for the reserved ball 1) of the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 used in the special figure 1 (A5001).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half fluctuation time value table (A5002) and acquires the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number (A5003). Further, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (A5004), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (A5005).

Then, the game control device 100 adds the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value (A5006), and saves the added value in the target special figure game processing timer area (A5007). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the information is being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (A5008). If the information is not set for the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A5008 is "N"), the information is being set for the special figure 2 variable display game, so the long fluctuation (long-term fluctuation) of the special figure 2 variable display game. (A5009).

When the game control device 100 does not start the length variation of the special figure 2 variation display game (the result of A5009 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves 0 in the repetition count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (A5010), and the special figure 2 2 When the length variation of the variable display game is started (the result of A5009 is “Y”), 9 is saved in the repeat count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (A5011). Special Figure 2 Fluctuation display In the long fluctuation of the game, the fluctuation time (for example, 10 minutes) that is not enough for the 2-byte timer is changed. Therefore, the predetermined number of repetitions (here, 9) of the special figure 2 game processing timer is the number of repetitions. Set in the area. In timer interrupt processing with an interrupt cycle of 4 msec (milliseconds), a 2-byte timer can be set up to about 262 seconds.

For example, when a timer of 60,000 msec (60 seconds) is set by saving the above-mentioned added value in the special figure game processing timer area and the number of repetitions of 9 times is further saved, timer interrupt processing (particularly, special figure 2). The timer is subtracted in the game processing (FIG. 15) (A3304), and when the time is up (the result of A3305 is "Y"), the number of repetitions is subtracted by 1 (A3307). The value of 60,000 ms (60 seconds) is set again (A3308). As a result, the special figure 2 variation display game of long variation can have a long variation time of 60,000 msec + (60,000 msec × 9) = 10 minutes.

The fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game when the fluctuation is not long (number of repetitions = 0) are the first half fluctuations saved in the special figure game processing timer area in step A5007. It is the sum of the time value and the latter half fluctuation time value.

When the game control device 100 is in the process of setting information regarding the special figure 1 variation display game (the result of A5008 is “Y”), the game control device 100 proceeds to step A5012 without setting the number of times the timer is repeated.

After steps A5008, A5010, and A5011, the game control device 100 prepares a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number (A5012), and prepares a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number (A5013). .. Then, the effect command setting process for transmitting the variable command as the effect command is executed (A5014).

Next, the game control device 100 updates the number of special figure reservations (the number of special figure 1 hold or the number of special figure 2 hold) of the target of the special figure change display game to be started by -1 (A5015), and the target special figure change. The content of the random number storage area related to the display game is shifted (A5016), and the empty area after the shift is cleared (A5017). Then, the fluctuation start information setting process is terminated.

By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination means for determining various random value values stored in the start storage means (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of the identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Decorate special figure variable display Set detailed production contents in the game. Information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games includes a decorative special figure hold number command including information on the number of start memories (holding number), a decorative special figure command including information on a stop symbol, and a variation of the special figure fluctuation display game. Variable commands including information about the pattern are mentioned, and these commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300. In particular, by transmitting the decorative special figure command before the variable command, the processing by the staging control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Time reduction fluctuation frequency update process]
Next, the details of the time reduction variation number update process (A3611a, A3611b) will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the time reduction variation number update process.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure is in the high probability (probability change state) (A5101). When the special figure high probability flag (in this embodiment, the special figure high probability & the time saving flag) is set in the special figure game mode flag area, it can be determined that the special figure high probability is in progress. When the special figure is in high probability (the result of A5101 is "Y"), the time reduction fluctuation number update process is terminated.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure time reduction is in progress (time reduction state) when the special figure is not in high probability (the result of A5101 is “N”) (A5102). When the special figure game mode flag area is set with the special figure time reduction flag (in this embodiment, the special figure low probability & time reduction flag), it can be determined that the special figure time reduction is in progress. If the special time reduction is not in progress (the result of A5102 is "N"), the time reduction variation number update process is terminated.

The game control device 100 updates the number of time reduction fluctuations by -1 (subtracts only 1) when the special figure time is shortened (the special figure has a low probability and the normal electric support is provided) (the result of A5102 is "Y"). ) (A5103). The initial value of the time reduction fluctuation number is the number of fluctuations in which the time saving state is maintained after the end of the big hit, and is set to, for example, 100 times (the big hit end setting process 2 described later). Further, regardless of whether the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game starts to fluctuate, the number of time-reduced fluctuations is updated by -1.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of time reduction fluctuations is 0 (A5104). When the time reduction variation number is not 0 (the result of A5104 is "N"), that is, when the time reduction state continues at the start of the next special figure variation display game, the game control device 100 updates the time reduction variation number. End the process. When the number of time reduction fluctuations is 0 (the result of A5104 is "Y"), the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the end of time reduction in the external information output data area (A5105). Here, the signal relating to the time reduction end is off-data of two jackpot signals. As a result, the signal relating to the end of working hours is output as external information to the external information terminal 71 and thus to an external device (such as a hall computer).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of working hours in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5106). The signals related to the end of the time reduction here are, for example, off-data of the special symbol 1 variable time shortened state signal, off-data of the special symbol 2 variable time shortened state signal, off-data of the normal symbol 1 variable time shortened state signal, and normal electric function. Object 1 Off data of open extension state signal.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the number in the low probability in the game state display number area (A5107), and saves the special figure low probability & no time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area of the RWM (A5108). , The normal figure time reduction no flag is saved in the normal figure game mode flag area (A5109), and the time reduction fluctuation number update process is completed.

In this way, by executing the time reduction fluctuation number update process in the second embodiment, the normal gaming state (special figure low probability and normal) is appropriately changed from the time saving state (special figure low probability and state with normal electric support). It is possible to shift to the state without electric support).

[Special Figure 1 Processing during fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 changing process (A3211) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process during the change in Special Figure 1.

First, the game control device 100 updates the number of times the symbol is fixed by +1 (A5301). The number of symbol confirmations output is used in the symbol editing process (part of the external information editing process) that outputs the symbol confirmation number signal generated when the stop symbol of the special symbol variation display game is confirmed to an external device. Will be done. Next, the decoration special figure 1 command is loaded from the decoration special figure 1 command area and prepared as an effect command (A5302), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5303). After that, the decoration special figure 1 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 1 variation display game is prepared as an effect command (A5304), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5305).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 1 as the display time (stop display time) of the stop symbol of the special figure 1 (A5306). For example, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is 600 msec if the stop symbol pattern is an outlier symbol of the special figure 1, and 2000 msec if the stop symbol pattern is the jackpot symbol of the special figure 1.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is out of order (A5307). If the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of order (the result of A5307 is "Y"), the information saved in the above-mentioned special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of off) is used as the special figure 1 stop symbol. It is loaded from the save area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (A5322).

In the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not out of order (in the case of a big hit) (the result of A5307 is "N"), the special figure 2 is also changing (the special figure 2 variable display game is also being executed). (A5308). If the special figure 2 is not changing (the result of A5308 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A5319. When the special figure 2 is also changing (the result of the special figure 2 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the processing during the display of the special figure 2 described later is being executed (A5309).

When the special figure 2 display process is being executed (the result of A5309 is “Y”), the game control device 100 shifts to the process of step A5311. When the special figure 2 display processing is not being executed (the result of A5309 is "N"), the number of symbol confirmation counts is updated by +1 (A5310). Subsequently, as the display time of the special figure 2, the display time of a value obtained by adding 4 msec to the display time of the special figure 1 (display time of the special figure 1 + 4 msec) is set (A5311) and displayed in the special figure 2 game processing timer area. Save time (A5312). Here, 4 msec is an interrupt cycle (predetermined time cycle) of timer interrupt processing. The reason why 4 msec is added is that the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (subtracted by 4 msec corresponding to the interrupt cycle) in the next special figure 2 game processing (A3304), so that it is added in excess. As a result, the actual display time of the stop symbol of the special figure 1 and the display time of the stop symbol of the special figure 2 can be made the same. If the stop display of Special Figure 2 has already started, the display time will be reset here (basically, the display time will be extended, but it may be shortened in some cases).

Next, the game control device 100 sets and prepares the out-of-order symbol command of the decorative special figure 2 as an effect command (A5313), saves it in the decorative special figure 2 command area (A5314), and executes the effect command setting process (A5314). A5315). Subsequently, the decoration special figure 2 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 2 variation display game is prepared as an effect command (A5316), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5317). After that, the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 for setting to execute the special figure 2 display process is executed (A5318). In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2, the process number "2" is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area, or the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped as a result of being missed.

By the processing of steps A5311 to A5318, the deviation result of the special figure 2 variable display game (including the decorative special figure 2 variable display game) is set in the special figure 1 variable display game, which is the control related to the special figure 1 variable display game. , Execution of special figure 2 display processing (end of special figure 2 variable display game) is set. In this way, even if the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (during the change of special figure 2), if the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a hit result (big hit), the special figure 2 variable display game is missed. As a result, the fluctuation will be forcibly terminated (forced termination).

The special figure 1 changing process is performed at the end of the variable time, that is, when the special figure 1 game processing timer (value of the special figure 1 game processing timer area set in step A5007) is timed up (A3206). Since the result is executed in "Y"), when the special figure 1 variable display game of the hit result stops variable, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly terminated (forced termination).

Next, the game control device 100 loads the decorative special figure 1 command from the decorative special figure 1 command area and saves it in the hit symbol command area (A5319). Next, the round number upper limit value information is loaded from the above-mentioned special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area, saved in the round number upper limit value information area (A5320), and large from the above-mentioned special figure 1 large winning opening opening information area. The winning opening opening information is loaded and saved in the large winning opening opening information area (A5321). After that, the information saved in the above-mentioned special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (A5322). Next, the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 (A5323) for setting to execute the special figure 1 display process is executed, and the special figure 1 variable process is terminated. In the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1, the special figure 1 is being displayed, such as saving the process number "2" in the special figure 1 game process number area or executing a process of stopping the special figure 1 variable display game. Perform the necessary processing to move to the processing.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 serves as a stop time setting means (display time setting means) for setting a stop time (display time) for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. Further, even if the game control device 100 is executing the special figure 2 variable display game (during the change of the special figure 2), if the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a hit result, the special figure 2 variable display game is removed. It is a forced termination means to force termination with the result.

[Special Figure 2 Processing during fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 changing process (A3313) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the processing during the change in Special Figure 2.

First, the game control device 100 updates the number of times the symbol is fixed by +1 (A5401). The symbol confirmation count output count is used in the symbol confirmation count signal editing process (part of the external information editing process) that outputs the symbol confirmation count signal generated when the stop symbol of the variable display game is fixed to an external device. .. Next, the decoration special figure 2 command is loaded from the decoration special figure 2 command area and prepared as an effect command (A5402), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5403). After that, the decoration special figure 2 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 2 variation display game is prepared as an effect command (A5404), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5405).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 2 as the display time (stop display time) of the stop symbol of the special figure 2 (A5406). For example, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is 600 msec if the stop symbol pattern is an outlier symbol of special figure 2, 600 msec if it is a big hit symbol of special figure 2, and 136 msec if it is a small hit symbol of special figure 2. be. The display time of the missed symbol and the big hit symbol of the special figure 2 is the same, but it is longer than the display time of the small hit symbol of the special figure 2.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is out of order (A5407). If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of order (the result of A5407 is "Y"), the information saved in the above-mentioned special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of off) is used as the special figure 2 stop symbol. It is loaded from the save area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A5427).

In the game control device 100, if the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not out of order (the result of A5407 is "N"), whether or not the special figure 1 is also changing (the special figure 1 variable display game is also running). (A5408). If the special figure 1 is not changing (the result of A5408 is "N"), the process proceeds to the process of step A5423. When the special figure 1 is also changing (the result of the special figure 2 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (A5409).

The game control device 100 sets the special figure 1 game interruption flag when the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is not a big hit (the result of A5409 is "N"), that is, when it is a small hit (A5412). , The decoration special figure 1 interruption command is prepared as an effect command (A5413), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5414). After that, the process proceeds to step A5423. In this way, even if the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (during the change of special figure 1), when the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a small hit, the special figure 1 variable display game becomes the special figure 1 game. It is interrupted by interrupting the measurement of the fluctuation time by the processing timer. In this case, the derivation of the result of the special figure 1 variable display game (display of the stop symbol corresponding to the stop symbol number) is postponed, and the special figure 1 that has been interrupted after the small hit operation related to the special figure 2 variable display game is completed. You can restart the variable display game.

When the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit (the result of A5409 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 display process described later is being executed (). A5410). If the process being displayed in the special figure 1 is being executed (the result of A5410 is “Y”), the process proceeds to the process of step A5415. When the special figure 1 display processing is not being executed (the result of A5410 is "N"), the number of symbol confirmation counts is updated by +1 (A5411). Subsequently, as the display time of the special figure 1, a display time of a value obtained by adding 4 msec to the display time of the special figure 2 (display time of the special figure 2 + 4 msec) is set (A5415) and displayed in the special figure 1 game processing timer area. Save time (A5416). Here, 4 msec is an interrupt cycle (predetermined time cycle) of timer interrupt processing. The reason why 4 msec is added is that the special figure 1 game processing timer is updated by -1 (subtracted by 4 msec corresponding to the interrupt cycle) in the next special figure 1 game processing (A3205), so that it is added in excess. As a result, the actual display time of the stop symbol of the special figure 2 and the display time of the stop symbol of the special figure 1 can be made the same. If the stop display of Special Figure 1 has already started, the display time will be reset here (basically, the display time will be extended, but it may be shortened in some cases).

Next, the game control device 100 sets and prepares the out-of-order symbol command of the decorative special figure 1 as an effect command (A5417), saves it in the decorative special figure 1 command area (A5418), and executes the effect command setting process (A5418). A5419). Subsequently, a decorative special figure 1 stop command for stopping the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5420), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5421). After that, the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 for setting to execute the special figure 1 display process is executed (A5422). In the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2, the process number "2" is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area, or the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped as a result of being missed.

By the processing of steps A5415 to A5422, the deviation result of the special figure 1 variable display game (including the decorative special figure 1 variable display game) is set in the special figure 2 variable display game, which is the control related to the special figure 2 variable display game. , Execution of special figure 1 display processing (end of special figure 1 variable display game) is set. In this way, even if the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (during the change of special figure 1), if the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a big hit, the special figure 1 variable display game is forced to be out of order. The fluctuation ends (execution ends).

The special figure 2 changing process is performed at the end of the variable time, that is, when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 and the special figure 2 game processing timer times up (results of A3305 and A3306). Is executed in "Y"), so that when the special figure 2 variable display game of the hit result stops changing, the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly terminated (executed).

Next, the game control device 100 loads the decorative special figure 2 command from the decorative special figure 2 command area and saves it in the hit symbol command area (A5423). Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit (A5424). Special Figure 2 When the result of the variable display game is a small hit (the result of A5424 is "Y"), the information saved in the above-mentioned special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of small hit) is displayed in special figure 2. It is loaded from the stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A5427).

When the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is not a small hit (when the result is a big hit) (the result of A5424 is "N"), the game control device 100 has the above-mentioned special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area to the round number upper limit. Load the value information and save it in the round number upper limit information area (A5425).
The large winning opening opening information is loaded from the above-mentioned special figure 2 large winning opening opening information area and saved in the large winning opening opening information area (A5426). After that, the information saved in the above-mentioned special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A5427). Next, the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 (A5428), which sets the setting for executing the special figure 2 display process, is executed (A5428), and the special figure 2 variable process is terminated. In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1, the special figure 2 is being displayed, such as saving the process number "2" in the special figure 2 game process number area or executing a process of stopping the special figure 2 variable display game. Perform the necessary processing to move to the processing.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 serves as a stop time setting means (display time setting means) for setting a stop time (display time) for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. Further, even if the game control device 100 is executing the special figure 1 variable display game (during the change of special figure 1), if the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a hit result, the special figure 1 variable display game is removed. It is a forced termination means to force termination with the result.

[Processing during display of special figure 1]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 display process (A3212) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process during display of the special figure 1.

First, the game control device 100 loads the jackpot flag 1 (indicating the jackpot information or the missed information) from the jackpot flag 1 area (A5701), and clears the jackpot flag 1 area (A5702). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit based on the big hit flag 1 (A5703).

When the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit (the result of A5703 is "Y"), the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the start of the special figure 1 big hit in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5704). ). For example, the signal relating to the start of the special figure 1 big hit is the on-data of the signal during operation of the condition device and the on-data of the signal per special symbol 1.

Next, the game control device 100 loads the hit symbol command from the hit symbol command area, prepares it as an effect command (A5705), and executes the effect command setting process (A5706). Since the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, this hit symbol command corresponds to the big hit symbol. Subsequently, a jackpot fanfare command is prepared as an effect command (A5707), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5708).

After that, the game control device 100 saves the signal corresponding to the large winning opening opening information and the probability state in the external information output data area (A5709). The signal here includes on-data (on-signal) of 2 jackpot signals and on-data (on-signal) of 3 jackpot signals. In this embodiment, it does not matter because the 2R jackpot does not exist, but the jackpot 2 signal may be turned off by the 2R probability variation jackpot in the low probability, and the jackpot 3 signal may be turned off by the 2R probability variation jackpot in the high probability. You may.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets the jackpot fanfare time corresponding to the jackpot opening information (A5710), and saves the jackpot fanfare time in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A5711).

Next, the game control device 100 sets "3" as the processing number in order to shift to the fanfare / interval processing (A5712), saves the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A5713), and fanfares. / Process during interval The transition setting process is executed (A5714), and the process during display of special figure 1 is terminated.

In the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing, the processing for shifting to the fanfare / interval processing is executed. Specifically, as the signal relating to the start of the jackpot, the on-data (on-signal) of one jackpot signal and the on-data (on-signal) of four jackpot signals are saved in the external information output data area. In addition, the signal related to the end of high probability & time saving is saved in the test signal output data area, and the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area. Further, the time reduction fluctuation frequency region for holding the time reduction fluctuation frequency is cleared. Also, clear the number of rounds area to 0.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is not a big hit (when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit) (the result of A5703 is "N"), that is, the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is If it is out of alignment, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game executed this time has a high probability final variation (A5715). The high-probability final fluctuation is a special figure fluctuation display game when the fall lottery (FIG. 20) is won. If it is not a high-probability final variation (the result of A5715 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game executed this time is a time-reduced final variation (A5716). The time reduction final variation is the final (for example, 100th) special figure variation display game in the time reduction state. When the time reduction is not the final variation (the result of A5716 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A5724.

The game control device 100 has a probability information command (low) indicating a low probability when it is a high-probability final variation (result of A5715 is “Y”) or when it is a time-reduced final variation (result of A5716 is “Y”). Probability) is prepared as an effect command (A5717), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5718). Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (A5719), and the left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (A5720). After that, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is in a small hit state (A5721). Special Figure 2 When the variable display game is in a small hit state (the result of A5721 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A5724.

When the game control device 100 is not in the small hit state of the special figure 2 variation display game (the result of A5721 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the signal related to the left-handed instruction in the test signal output data area (A5722). Subsequently, in order to turn off the second game status display unit 56 (lamps D8-D10) that notifies that it is a right-handed hit, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game status display number 2 area (A5723). , Clear the special figure 1 changing in the special figure status area (information subtraction) (A5724). After that, since the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of order, "0" is set as the processing number of the special figure 1 normal processing in order to shift to the special figure 1 normal processing, and the special figure 1 game processing number area is set. Save the processing number (A5725). Then, the process of displaying the special figure 1 is terminated.

[Processing during display of special figure 2]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 display process (A3314) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. 38A and 38B are flowcharts showing the procedure of the process during display of the special figure 2. FIG. 38A shows the first half portion of the processing during display of the special figure 2, and FIG. 38B shows the latter half portion of the processing during the display of the special figure 2.

First, the game control device 100 loads the small hit flag 2 (indicating the small hit information or the missed information) from the small hit flag 2 area (A5801), and clears the small hit flag 2 area (A5802). Subsequently, the jackpot flag 2 (indicating the jackpot information or the missed information) is loaded from the jackpot flag 2 area (A5803), and the jackpot flag 2 area is cleared (A5804). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit based on the big hit flag 2 (A5805).

When the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit (the result of A5805 is “Y”), the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the start of the special figure 2 big hit in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5806). ). For example, the signal relating to the start of the special figure 2 big hit is the on-data of the condition device operating signal and the on-data of the special symbol 2 hit signal.

Next, the game control device 100 loads the hit symbol command from the hit symbol command area, prepares it as an effect command (A5807), and executes the effect command setting process (A5808). Since the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, this hit symbol command corresponds to the big hit symbol. Subsequently, a jackpot fanfare command is prepared as an effect command (A5809), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5810).

After that, the game control device 100 saves the signal corresponding to the large winning opening opening information and the probability state in the external information output data area (A5811). The signal here includes on-data of 2 jackpot signals and on-data of 3 jackpot signals. In this embodiment, it does not matter because the 2R jackpot does not exist, but the jackpot 2 signal may be turned off by the 2R probability variation jackpot in the low probability, and the jackpot 3 signal may be turned off by the 2R probability variation jackpot in the high probability. You may.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets the jackpot fanfare time corresponding to the jackpot opening information (A5812), and saves the jackpot fanfare time in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A5813). Then, “3” is set as the processing number in order to shift to the fanfare / interval processing (A5814).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A5815), executes the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (A5816), and ends the special drawing 2 display processing. .. The fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing is the same as that executed in the processing during display of Special Figure 1.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is not a big hit (the result of A5805 is "N"), the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a small hit based on the small hit flag 2. It is determined whether or not (whether or not the small hit flag 2 is a small hit) (A5817). When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit (the result of A5817 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game executed this time has a high probability final fluctuation (A5818). If it is not a high-probability final variation (the result of A5818 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game executed this time is a time-reduced final variation (A5819). When the time reduction is not the final variation (the result of A5819 is “N”), the process of steps A5820 to A5823 is not performed, and the process proceeds to the process of step A5824.

The game control device 100 determines that the special figure 2 variation display game executed this time has a high probability final variation (the result of A5818 is “Y”) or the time reduction final variation (the result of A5819 is “Y”). ”), A probability information command (low probability) indicating a low probability is prepared as an effect command (A5822), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5821).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the probability information command (low probability) in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery of the RWM (A5822), and clears the left-handed instruction notification flag (A5823). After that, the hit symbol command is loaded from the hit symbol command area, prepared as an effect command (A5824), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5825). Since the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit, this hit symbol command corresponds to the small hit symbol.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a small hit fanfare command as an effect command (A5826), and executes an effect command setting process (A5827). Then, the signal related to the right-handed instruction (on-data of the launch position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5828), and the second game state display unit 56 (lamp D8-) that notifies that it is right-handed. In order to light D10), the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A5829).

Next, in the game control device 100, since the lower prize opening is opened by a small hit in the present embodiment, the lower grand prize opening fraudulent winning number area is cleared (A5830), and the lower large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area is cleared. The flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved (A5831), the special figure 2 small hit fanfare processing transition setting process is executed (A5832), and the special figure 2 display process is terminated. Although the big winning opening is opened by a small hit, the screen of the display device 41 does not have to be changed.

In the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process, the process for shifting to the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle process is executed. Specifically, "7" is set as the processing number in order to shift to the processing during the small hit fanfare, and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area. Further, the small hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area, and the signal related to the start of the small hit (on-data of one big hit signal) is saved in the external information output data area. Further, the signal relating to the start of the special figure 2 small hit (on-data of the special symbol 2 small hit signal) is saved in the test signal output data area, and the small hit middle information is saved in the special figure status area.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is not a small hit (when the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit) (the result of A5817 is "N"), that is, the special figure 2 variation display game. If the result of the above is out of order, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game executed this time has a high probability final variation (A5833). If it is not a high-probability final variation (the result of A5833 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game executed this time is a time-reduced final variation (A5834). If the time reduction is not the final variation (the result of A5834 is “N”), the process of steps A5835 to A5839 is not performed, and the process proceeds to step A5840.

The game control device 100 has a high probability final variation (result of A5833 is “Y”) or a time-reduced final variation (result of A5834 is “Y”), and a probability information command (low probability). Is prepared as an effect command (A5835), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5836). Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (A5837), and the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (A5838).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 displays the number in the left-handed state in the game state display number 2 area in order to turn off the second game state display unit 56 (lamps D8-D10) for notifying that the game is right-handed. Is saved (A5839), and the special figure 2 in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (A5840). After that, since the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of order, "0" is set as the processing number of the special figure 2 normal processing in order to shift to the special figure 2 normal processing, and the special figure 1 game processing number area is set. Save the processing number (A5841). Then, the process of displaying the special figure 2 is terminated.

[Fanfare / Processing during interval]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing (A3213, A3315) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process will be described. 39A and 39B are flowcharts showing the procedure of fanfare / interval processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the remaining ball counter for counting the remaining balls of the special variation winning devices 38 and 39 is 0 (A6001). When the remaining ball counter is not 0 (the result of A6001 is "N"), the fanfare / interval processing is terminated. When the remaining ball counter is 0 (the result of A6001 is "Y"). It is determined whether or not it is the first big hit round (A6002). If it is not the first jackpot round (the result of A6002 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A6010.

When the game control device 100 is the first big hit round (the result of A6002 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the game ball has passed at the normal drawing start gate 34 (A6003). When the game ball does not pass through the normal figure start gate 34 (the result of A6003 is "N"), the fanfare / interval processing is terminated. That is, until the right-handed hit is started and the game ball passes through the normal drawing start gate 34, the process does not shift to the process related to the big hit (such as the process during opening of the big winning opening).

The game control device 100 sets information regarding the start of the jackpot when the game ball passes through the normal drawing start gate 34 (the result of A6003 is "Y"), that is, when the right-handed hit is started. Execute (A6004-A6009). First, the round number upper limit table is set (A6004), the round number upper limit corresponding to the round number upper limit information in the round number upper limit information area is acquired from the round number upper limit table, and the round number upper limit area of RWM is obtained. Save to (A6005). In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of rounds is 10R and 4R.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 acquires a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information in the round number upper limit value information area from the round number upper limit value table, and saves the round LED pointer in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (A6006). Then, in this embodiment, since the upper prize opening is opened by the big hit, the upper prize winning opening fraudulent winning number area is cleared (A6007), and the fraud monitoring period outside flag is set in the RWM upper prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area. Is saved (A6008), and the on-output data of the signal during operation of the accessory continuous actuator is saved in the test signal output data area (A6009).

Next, the game control device 100 updates the number of rounds in the round number region by +1 (A6010). Since the number of rounds in the number of rounds area is cleared to 0 in the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing, it is 0 before the start of the big hit operation this time. After that, the large winning opening opening information and the round command corresponding to the number of rounds are prepared as the effect command (A6011), and the effect command setting process is executed (A6012).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the initial value of the jackpot processing control pointer corresponding to the jackpot opening information and the number of rounds (A6013), and saves the game in the jackpot processing control pointer area of the RWM (A6014). Here, in the case of a pattern in which the opening and closing of the big winning opening is repeated during one round, 0 is set as the initial value, and in the case of the pattern in which the big winning opening is opened only once in one round, the upper limit is suddenly set as the initial value. Set the value (= 21). In the case of a pattern in which opening and closing is repeated, the initial value does not have to be 0, but a value larger than 0 and less than the upper limit value may be used (that is, starting from an intermediate value). Next, the large winning opening opening information and the large winning opening opening time corresponding to the number of rounds are set (A6015).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is a lever solenoid operation round that operates the lever solenoid 86b that opens the specific area 86 (V winning opening) (A6016). In the present embodiment, the lever solenoid operation round is the jackpot round 1 (the first jackpot round).

The game control device 100 sets the operation data of the lever solenoid 86b (A6017) when the lever solenoid operation round is set (the result of A6016 is “Y”). Here, the lever solenoid opens the specific area 86 in a long time in the case of a probabilistic jackpot (10R or 4R probabilistic jackpot) and in a short time (very short time) in the case of a normal jackpot (10R normal jackpot). Set the operation data of 86b. Specifically, the data is set in the lever solenoid control pointer area, and the lever solenoid control timer is cleared to 0. On the other hand, when it is not the lever solenoid operation round (the result of A6016 is "N"), the stop data of the lever solenoid is set (A6018).

Next, the game control device 100 sets "4" as the processing number in order to shift to the processing during the opening of the big winning opening (A6019), and determines whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure 1 variable display game (A6019). A6020). If it is a big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A6020 is "Y"), this processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A6021), and the big winning opening opening time is set to the special figure 1 game processing. Save to the timer area (A6022). If it is not a big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A6020 is "N"), this processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6023), and the big winning opening opening time is set to the special figure 2 game processing timer. Save to the area (A6024).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the start of opening of the upper prize opening (on-data of the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1) in the test signal output data area (A6025), and outputs the solenoid of the special winning opening of the RWM. Turn on the upper prize opening solenoid 39b (large winning opening solenoid 2) in the data area Save the upper prize opening on data (A6026), clear the number of big winning openings count (A6027), and process during fanfare / interval To finish.

In this embodiment, only the big hit that opens only the upper big winning opening exists, but two types of the big hit that opens only the upper big winning opening and the big hit that opens only the lower big winning opening may be provided. It is also possible to provide a jackpot that opens both the upper and lower prize openings.

[Special figure 1 jackpot end processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 big hit end process (A3216) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 big hit end processing.

First, the game control device 100 executes a subroutine call based on the time reduction determination data (A6101). When the time reduction determination data is data without time reduction, the jackpot end setting process 1 is executed in order to shift to the normal gaming state after the end of the jackpot (A6102), and when the time reduction determination data is data with time reduction, the jackpot is hit. The jackpot end setting process 2 is executed in order to shift to the time saving state after the end (A6103).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is specific area passage information indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area 86 (V winning opening) (A6104). As described above, in the jackpot round 1 (first jackpot round) in the case of the probability variation jackpot (10R or 4R probability variation jackpot), the specific area 86 is opened for a long time (A6017), and the specific area switch 72 is set to the specific area. The passage of the game ball to 86 (V prize) is almost certainly detected (regular passage in a specific area). Then, the game control device 100 can store the specific area passage information indicating that the game ball has passed to the specific area 86 (V winning) when there is a detection signal of the specific area switch 72 in the RAM. be.

Even in the jackpot round 1 in the case of a normal jackpot (10R normal jackpot), the specific area 86 is opened only for a very short time, but the specific area switch 72 is an accidental game ball to the specific area 86 (V winning opening). It may be possible to detect passage (V prize) (irregular passage in a specific area). Also in this case, the game control device 100 can store the specific area passage information in the RAM.

When there is no specific area passage information (the result of A6104 is "N"), the game control device 100 shifts to the process of step A6106. On the other hand, when there is information passing through a specific area (the result of A6104 is "Y"), the jackpot end setting process 3 is executed (A6105) in order to shift to the probability change state (probability fluctuation state) after the jackpot ends. In this case, the data set in the jackpot end setting process 3 is overwritten with the data set in the jackpot end setting processes 1 and 2, and the data set in the jackpot end setting processes 1 and 2 is invalidated. Become.

Next, the game control device 100 loads the probability information command from the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (A6106). In the jackpot end setting process 1-3, a probability information command indicating the presence or absence of a low-probability or high-probability probability state or a time-saving state is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery.

After that, the game control device 100 determines whether or not there has been an irregular passage in the specific region (A6107). As described above, the specific area irregular passage (specific area abnormal passage) means that the game ball passes through the specific area 86 in the case of a normal big hit, and the specific area regular passage (specific area normal passage) means. In the case of a probabilistic jackpot, the game ball passes through the specific area 86. For example, if the specific area passage information is generated in the case of a normal big hit, it can be determined that the specific area irregular passage has occurred. It should be noted that not only the regular passage in the specific region but also the irregular passage in the specific region shifts to the probable change state (probability fluctuation state) after the end of the big hit.

When the game control device 100 has an irregular passage in a specific area (the result of A6107 is "Y"), the game control device 100 includes the loaded probability information command with irregular probability variation information added (A6108), and this probability information. The effect command setting process is executed so that the command is set as the effect command (A6109). On the other hand, when there is no irregular passage in the specific area (the result of A6107 is "N"), the effect command setting process is executed so that the loaded probability information command is set as the effect command as it is (A6109).

Next, the game control device 100 sets "0" as the processing number in order to return to the special figure 1 normal processing (A6110), and saves the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A6111). Then, the signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (A6112). The signals relating to the end of the jackpot here are off-data of one jackpot signal and off-data of three jackpot signals.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of the jackpot in the test signal output data area (A6113). The signals relating to the end of the jackpot here are, for example, off-data of the signal during operation of the condition device, off-data of the signal during operation of the continuous accessory operation device, off-data of the signal per special symbol 1, and off-data of the signal per special symbol 2. Is.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the turn-off number in the round LED pointer area (A6114). Subsequently, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the fraud monitoring period flag area of the upper prize-winning opening (A6115), and the special figure status area is cleared (A6116). After that, the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A6117), and the special figure 1 big hit end processing is terminated.

This special figure 2 game wait time value determines the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game that has been forcibly terminated (special figure 2 normal processing during special figure 2 game processing), and is used for the next timer interrupt processing (FIG. 7). It is set to sometimes delay. Here, the special figure 2 game wait time value is 8 msec (that is, 2 as a value saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area), which is twice the interrupt cycle.

Assuming that the special figure 2 game wait time value is not set, the special figure 2 game process (A1313 in FIG. 7) performed immediately after the current special figure 1 game process (A1313 in FIG. 7) in which the special figure 1 big hit end process is executed ( In A1314) of FIG. 7, since the determination of the variation start of the special figure 2 variation display game starts (starts within the timer interrupt process of this time), the special figure 2 variation display game is started from the special figure 1 variation display game. It may be a problem because it starts first. Since the special figure 1 game processing timer is not set in the special figure 1 big hit end processing, it remains 0. Therefore, the determination of the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 variation display game is performed in the next timer interrupt process (special figure 1 normal process during the special figure 1 game process).

The special figure 2 game wait time value is set to twice the interrupt cycle (8 msec), but the special figure 2 game process immediately after the special figure 1 game process (starts in the current timer interrupt process). ), The special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (decrease of 4 msec). In the special figure 2 game processing in the next timer interrupt processing, the special figure 2 game processing timer is further updated by -1 (decrease of 4 msec) to 0 (the result of A3305 is "Y"), and the special figure 2 variable display game. (Special figure 2 during game processing, special figure 2 normal processing) is performed. As a result, in the next timer interrupt process after the end of the jackpot state by the special figure 1 variable display game, the determination of the variable start of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game (special figure 1 game processing and special figure). 2) If the game process) is performed and the start condition (start condition) is satisfied, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can start variable at the same time. As described above, while the special figure 1 variable display game is in the big hit state, the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped with a missed symbol (whether it is forcibly terminated or originally not changed).

If there is no particular problem in game control even if the special figure 2 variable display game is started before the special figure 1 variable display game after the end of the big hit state, the process of step A6717 is omitted. FIG. 2 It is not necessary to set the game wait time value.

[Special figure 2 big hit end processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 big hit end process (A3318) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 big hit end processing.

The steps A6201 to A6216 of the special figure 2 big hit end process replace "special figure 1" in the special figure 1 big hit end process steps A6101 to A6116 with "special figure 2", respectively, and the special figure 1 big hit end process. Since the same processing as in the processing steps A6101 to A6116 is performed, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

It is not necessary to provide the special figure 1 game wait time value in the special figure 2 big hit end process. Since the special figure 1 game processing timer and the special figure 2 game processing timer are not set, they remain 0, and in the next timer interrupt processing, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game start to change. If the determination (inside the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process) is performed and the start condition (start condition) is satisfied, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game start to change at the same time. Because it can be done.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
Next, the details of the big hit end setting process 1 (A6102, A6202) in the special figures 1 and 2 big hit end process will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 1.

First, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the start of no time reduction state (no time reduction) in the external information output data area (A6301). Here, the signal relating to the start without the time saving state is off-data of two jackpot signals. The signal relating to the start without the time saving state is saved in the test signal output data area (A6302). Here, the signals related to the start without the time saving state are the off-data of the special symbol 1 high-probability state signal, the off-data of the special symbol 2 high-probability state signal, the off-data of the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, and the special symbol 2 variation. It is the off data of the time shortening state signal, the off data of the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal, and the off data of the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the number without the time reduction state in the game state display number area (A6303), saves the normal time reduction flag in the normal figure game mode flag area (A6304), and saves the special figure game. Save the special low probability & no time reduction flag in the mode flag area (A6305). The flag for no time reduction in the normal map indicates that the game is not in the time reduction fluctuation state (time reduction state, normal power support state) of the normal map fluctuation display game. The special figure low probability & no time reduction flag indicates that the probability of a big hit is low and it is not in the time reduction state (conducting support state).

After that, the game control device 100 clears the time reduction fluctuation frequency region to 0 (A6306), and saves the signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, the off data of the launch position designation signal 1) in the test signal output data region (A6307). .. Then, in order to turn off the right-handed display LED (first game state display unit 57), the left-handed number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A6308), and the power failure recovery transmission command area is used. The probability information command (low probability) indicating a low probability is saved (A6309), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is terminated.

[Big hit end setting process 2]
Next, the details of the big hit end setting process 2 (A6103, A6203) in the special figures 1 and 2 big hit end process will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 2.

First, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the start of the time reduction in the external information output data area (A6501). Here, the signal relating to the start of the time reduction is on-data of two jackpot signals. The on-data of the big hit 2 signals is saved in the external information output data area at the start of the big hit fanfare (A5709, A5811), and the on-data of the big hit 2 signals continues from the big hit to the external information terminal 71. As a result, it will be output to an external device (such as a hall computer).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the start of the time reduction state (time reduction) in the test signal output data area (A6502). Here, the signals related to the start with the time saving state are the off-data of the special symbol 1 high-probability state signal, the off-data of the special symbol 2 high-probability state signal, the on-data of the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation. The on-data of the time shortening state signal, the on-data of the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal, and the on-data of the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the number with the time saving state in the game state display number area (A6503), saves the flag with the time saving state in the normal figure game mode flag area (A6504), and saves the special figure game. Save the special figure low probability & time saving flag in the mode flag area (A6505). The flag with the normal time reduction indicates that the time reduction fluctuation state (time reduction state, normal power support state) of the normal map fluctuation display game. The special figure low probability & time reduction flag indicates that the probability of a big hit is low probability and the time reduction state (normal electric support state).

Next, the game control device 100 saves an initial value (for example, 100) in the time reduction fluctuation number area for storing the time reduction fluctuation number (A6506), and the probability of indicating that the time reduction state is in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery. The information command (time reduction) is saved (A6507), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is terminated.

Since the right-handed state is advantageous from the big hit state, the right-handed setting is not performed in the big hit end setting process 2.

[Big hit end setting process 3]
Next, the details of the big hit end setting process 3 (A6105, A6205) in the special figures 1 and 2 big hit end process will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 3.

First, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the start of the time reduction in the external information output data area (A6801). Here, the signal relating to the start of the time reduction is on-data of two jackpot signals. The on-data of the big hit 2 signals is saved in the external information output data area at the start of the big hit fanfare (A5709, A5811), and the on-data of the big hit 2 signals continues from the big hit to the external information terminal 71. As a result, it will be output to an external device (such as a hall computer).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the start with high probability and time saving in the test signal output data area (A6802). Here, the signals related to the start with high probability & time reduction are the on-data of the special symbol 1 high-probability state signal, the on-data of the special symbol 2 high-probability state signal, the on-data of the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, and the special symbol. 2 It is on-data of the fluctuation time shortening state signal.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the number with the time saving state in the game state display number area (A6803), and saves the special figure high probability & time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (A6804). The special figure high probability & time reduction flag indicates that the probability of a big hit is high probability and the time reduction state (here, the time reduction fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game is executed).

After that, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the right-handed instruction (for example, on-data of the launch position designation signal 1) in the test signal output data area (A6805). Then, in order to light the right-handed display LED (first game state display unit 57), the right-handed number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A6806), and the power failure recovery transmission command area is used. The probability information command (high probability) indicating a high probability is saved (A6807), and the jackpot end setting process 3 is terminated.

[Small hit fanfare processing]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare middle processing (A3319) in the special figure 2 game processing will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the procedure of processing during small hit fanfare.

First, the game control device 100 prepares a small hit opening command for opening the lower prize opening as an effect command (A6901), and executes an effect command setting process (A6902). Next, "8" is set as the processing number (A6903), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6904), and the small hit opening time (for example, 1600 msec) is set as the opening time of the lower prize winning opening. Special figure 2 Save in the game processing timer area (A6905).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the start of the small hit operation (on-data of the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 2) in the test signal output data area (A6906), and saves the signal in the large winning opening solenoid output data area. Save the lower prize winning opening on-data (A6907). As a result, the lower large winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is opened in the small hit of the special figure 2 variable display game.

Next, the game control device 100 clears the large winning opening count area for storing the count number (number of detections) of the large winning opening count switch (lower large winning opening switch 38a and / or upper special winning opening switch 39a). Then (A6908), the processing during the small hit fanfare is completed.

In this embodiment, there is only a small hit opening pattern in which the large winning opening opens only once, but there may be a small hit opening pattern in which the opening and closing of the large winning opening is repeated. Further, by setting "8" as the processing number, it is possible to shift to the small hit medium processing after the small hit fanfare middle processing is completed.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 small hit end process (A3322) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 small hit end processing.

The game control device 100 sets “0” as the processing number in order to return to the normal processing in the special figure 2 (A7301), and saves the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A7302). Subsequently, the signal related to the end of the small hit (off data of the special symbol 2 small hit signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (A7303), and the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area. (A7304). Further, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (A7305), and the special figure status area is cleared (A7306).

Next, in the game control device 100, whether or not the probability of occurrence of a big hit is in a low probability state and there is no time reduction (state without normal electric support), that is, in the special figure low probability & no time reduction (normally). It is determined whether or not the player is in the gaming state (A7307). When it is not during the special figure low probability & no time reduction (during the normal gaming state) (the result of A7307 is "N"), the processing after step A7310 is executed.

The game control device 100 outputs a signal related to a left-handed instruction (off data of the launch position designation signal 1) when the special figure low probability & no time reduction is in progress (normal game state is in progress) (result of A7307 is “Y”). It is saved in the test signal output data area (A7308), the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A7309), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted (A7309). A7310).

When the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted (the result of A7310 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prepares the decorative special figure 1 restart command as an effect command (A7311), and executes the effect command setting process. (A7312). The effect control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 1 restart command can execute the process of restarting the decoration special figure 1 variation display game. After that, the special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (A7313), and the special figure 2 small hit end process is terminated. If the special figure 1 variable display game is not interrupted (the result of A7310 is "N"), the special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (A7313) without preparing the decorative special figure 1 restart command, and the special figure 2 End the small hit end process

For the same reason as in the special figure 2 big hit end process (FIG. 41), it is not necessary to provide the game wait time value in the special figure 2 small hit end process.

[Control of staging control device]
The control (processing) executed by the staging control device 300 by the staging control program will be described below.

[Main processing (staging control device)]
First, the details of the main processing executed by the staging control device 300 will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main process (main program) executed by the effect control device 300. The main process is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (the effect microcomputer) when the power is turned on to the gaming machine 10. In the flowchart of the process executed by the effect control device 300, the code (number) of the step is represented as "B ***".

When the execution of the main process is started, the effect control device 300 first disables interrupts (B0001). Next, the initial settings of the CPU 311 and VDP 312 are executed (B0002, B0003), and interrupts are permitted (B0004). When the interrupt is permitted, the command reception interrupt process for receiving the command transmitted from the game control device 100 is ready to be executed.

Next, the staging control device 300 permits the generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 or the like (B0005), and sets a random number seed to be used for random number generation (B0006). Then, the initial value at the time of turning on the power is saved in the area to be initialized (B0007).

Subsequently, the staging control device 300 clears the WDT (watchdog timer) (B0008). The WDT is started with the CPU initial setting (B0002) described above, and monitors whether the CPU 311 is operating normally. If the WDT is not cleared even after a certain period of time, the WDT time is up and the CPU 311 is reset.

After that, the staging control device 300 executes an RTC reading process for reading time information from the RTC (real-time clock) 338 as a timekeeping means (B0009).

In the RTC reading process, the time information may be read from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle (for example, every minute), and it is not necessary to read the time information every time the process shifts to step B0009. Further, the RTC reading process may be executed only once when the power is turned on to the effect control device 300 (that is, the power is turned on to the gaming machine 10) (the position of the RTC reading process may be changed, for example, step B0003). And B0004 may be executed). The effect control device 300 sets a time timer (time measuring means) for measuring the time in the timer area in the RAM, and when the time information is read from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle or when the power is turned on, the time is set from the RTC 338 only once. When the information is read, the time timer may be adjusted to match the time of RTC338. Then, the staging control device 300 may execute various processes by using the time timer instead of the RTC 338. By doing so, the number of times of processing for reading the time from the RTC 338 can be reduced, and the load on the CPU 311 is reduced.

In the RTC reading process, if the read time matches any of a plurality of predetermined times (first predetermined time, second predetermined time, ...), A predetermined effect may be executed, but a plurality of By drawing a lottery for the time interval of the predetermined time with a probability corresponding to the set value, the player can estimate the set value from this time interval. For example, the lottery may be performed so that the selection rate at long time intervals becomes smaller as the set value is larger. Further, the player can estimate the set value from the execution period of the predetermined effect by drawing a lottery for the execution period for executing the predetermined effect with a probability corresponding to the set value. For example, the lottery may be performed so that the selection rate for a long execution period becomes larger as the set value is larger.

Next, the effect control device 300 detects an operation signal of the effect button 25 (signal of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b) by the player, or changes the effect content (setting) according to the detected signal. The effect button input process is executed (B0010). Subsequently, the hall / player setting mode process for accepting operations such as changing the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal by the person in charge of the game hall (game store) or the player is executed (B0011). In the hall / player setting mode processing, the player can customize the effect according to the effect points described later.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes an effect point control process for adding or clearing the effect points (B0012). In the effect point control process, the effect points are added by executing the effect or operation for which the effect points are to be added, and at the end of the game so that the effect points can be carried over to the next game. For example, information including information on the effect point is displayed on the display device 41 as a QR code (registered trademark). For example, the effect control device 300 can display the QR code (registered trademark) on the display device 41 in the hall / player setting mode processing. The player can estimate the set value from the added value by drawing a value (added value) to be added to the effect points with a probability according to the set value. For example, the lottery may be performed so that the selection rate of a large addition value increases as the set value increases.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes a random number update process for updating a random number such as an effect random number (B0013), analyzes a received command received from the game control device 100, and executes a corresponding received command check process. (B0014). The details of the received command check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 48.

Next, the staging control device 300 updates various data according to the contents to be displayed on the display device (display means) such as the display device 41, or sets the drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. The effect display editing process to be performed is executed (B0015). As for the drawing data set at this time, the image of the display device 41 can be updated without any problem as long as the VDP 312 can complete the drawing within the frame period of 1/30 second (about 33.3 msec). Then, the preparation for drawing in the display frame buffer is completed, and the drawing command preparation end setting is executed (B0016).

Subsequently, the staging control device 300 determines whether or not it is the frame switching timing (B0017). If it is not the frame switching timing (the result of B0017 is "N"), the process of B0017 is repeated until the frame switching timing is reached, and if it is the frame switching timing (the result of B0017 is "Y"), the display device 41 is displayed. Instruct screen drawing (B0018). Since the frame period of the present embodiment is 1/30 second, the frame is switched when the periodic V blank (image update) is executed twice, for example, every 1/60 second (1/2 of the frame period). .. The image may not be updated in 1/60 seconds, and the interval may be further increased.

Further, the staging control device 300 executes a sound control process for controlling the sound output from the speaker 19 (B0019).

Further, the staging control device 300 executes a decoration control process for controlling a decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) including LEDs and the like (B0020). In the decoration control process, for example, light emission control of a decoration device such as an LED is executed.

Further, the effect control device 300 executes a movable body control process for controlling an effect device (board effect device 44, frame effect device) such as an electric accessory driven by a motor and a solenoid (B0021). In the movable body control process, for example, the accessory operation effect for driving the motor is set.

Then, when the effect control device 300 finishes the process of the above-mentioned B0021, the effect control device 300 returns to the process of B0008. After that, the processes from B0008 to B0021 are repeated.

[Receive command check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the details of the received command check process (B0014) in the above-mentioned main process (FIG. 47) will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command check process executed by the effect control device 300.

First, the effect control device 300 loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the command reception number in order to check the command number received from the game control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of command receptions is 0 (B1102). When the number of commands received is 0, that is, when there is no command received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "N"), there is no command to analyze, so the received command check process ends.

On the other hand, when the number of commands received is not 0, that is, when the command is received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 is a command reception counter in the command reception counter area. After subtracting the value by the number of received commands (B1103), the contents of the received command buffer of the RAM are copied to the command area for analysis (B1104). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem even if the number of command received is subtracted before copying the contents in the buffer to the command area. Also, even if a new command is received during copying, the data will not be overwritten.

Then, the effect control device 300 updates the command read index by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (adds only 1) (B1105). The receive command buffer is configured to store up to 32 received commands. The received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of the command read index 0 to 31, and here, the received commands are read in the order of the index and copied to the command area for analysis. When the copy to the command area for analysis is completed, the storage area of the received command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the copy of the command for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1106), and if the copy is not completed (the result of B1106 is "N". ”), The processing of steps B1104 to B1106 is repeated.

When the effect control device 300 receives the command transmitted from the game control device 100, the content of the received command is saved in the reception command buffer, and at the same time, the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the received command buffer, the received commands are analyzed separately in the command area for analysis. Then, when the content of the received command is copied to the command area for analysis, the received command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. In this way, by always securing a free area without performing analysis directly in the received command buffer, it is possible to prepare for a large amount of commands received.

Subsequently, when the copy is completed (the result of B1106 is “Y]), the effect control device 300 loads the received command content of the command area for analysis (B1107), and analyzes the content of the received command. The process is executed (B1108). The details of the received command analysis process will be described later in FIG. 49 below. Further, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109). After that, the process of step B1101. It is determined whether or not the analysis of the command for the number of received commands loaded in is completed (B1110), and if the analysis is not completed (the result of B1110 is "N"), the processes of steps B1107 to B1110 are performed. repeat. When the analysis is completed (the result of B1110 is "Y]), the received command check process is terminated.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the details of the received command analysis process (B1108) in the above-mentioned received command check process (FIG. 48) will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command analysis process executed by the effect control device 300.

First, the staging control device 300 separates the upper byte of the received command as a MODE unit and the lower byte as an ACTION unit (ACT unit) (B1201). The command transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 is composed of a MODE unit (MODE command) and an ACTION unit (ACTION command), and is usually continuously transmitted from the MODE unit indicating the type of the command. To. Therefore, the upper and lower parts of the received command are configured in the order of the MODE part and the ACTION part.

Next, the staging control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit is in the normal range (B1202). That is, it is determined whether or not the value (value assigned as the command specification indicating the type) that can be taken by the MODE unit indicating the type of the command. Then, when the MODE unit is in the normal range (the result of B1202 is “Y”), it is similarly determined whether or not the ACTION unit is in the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether or not the value (value assigned as the command specification indicating the content) that can be taken by the ACTION unit indicating the content of the command (specific effect instruction, etc.). Then, when the ACTION section is in the normal range (the result of B1203 is "Y"), the ACTION section for the MODE section determines whether or not the combination is correct (B1204). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the ACTION section is a value that can be taken by the type of command specified by the MODE section. Then, if the combination is correct (the result of B1204 is "Y"), the command processing according to the command system is executed in the processing after B1205.

The staging control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE unit is within the range of the variable command (B1205). The variable command is a command for instructing a variable pattern of a special decorative symbol, and there is a variable command (set in the variable start information setting process). Then, when the MODE unit represents a variable command (the result of B1205 is "Y"), the variable command process is executed (B1206), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a variable command (the result of B1205 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit is within the range of the hit command (B1207). The hit-type command is a command for instructing an operation (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) related to the effect during hitting. Interval command (set in process during interval opening), interval command (set in process during opening of big winning opening), ending command (set in processing during opening of big winning opening), small hit fanfare command, command during opening of small hit (small hit round command), Small hit end screen command (small hit ending command), etc. Then, when the MODE unit represents a hit-type command (the result of B1207 is "Y"), the hit-type command process is executed (B1208), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a hit command (the result of B1207 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit is within the range of the symbol command (B1209). The symbol-based commands include a decorative special figure 1 command and a decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. Then, when the MODE unit represents a symbol-based command (the result of B1209 is "Y"), the symbol-based command process is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a symbol-based command (the result of B1209 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit is within the range of a single-shot command (B1211). Then, when the MODE unit represents a single-shot command (the result of B1211 is "Y"), the single-shot command process is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a single-shot command (the result of B1211 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit is within the range of the look-ahead symbol command (B1213). .. The look-ahead symbol command includes a look-ahead stop symbol command. Then, when the MODE unit represents a look-ahead symbol-based command (the result of B1213 is "Y"), the look-ahead symbol-based command processing is executed (B1214), and the reception command analysis processing is terminated. If the jackpot probability at the time of reception is in the low probability state, the look-ahead symbol command processing is executed using the look-ahead stop symbol command (low probability), and if the jackpot probability at the time of reception is in the high probability state, the look-ahead is executed. A look-ahead symbol-based command process may be executed using a stop symbol command (low probability).

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section is within the range of the look-ahead variable command when the MODE section does not represent the look-ahead symbol command (the result of B1213 is "N") (B1215). ). The look-ahead fluctuation command includes a look-ahead fluctuation pattern command. Then, when the MODE unit represents a look-ahead variable command (the result of B1215 is "Y"), the look-ahead variable command process is executed (B1216), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

On the other hand, the staging control device 300 may have received an unexpected command (for example, a command used only in the test mode) when the MODE unit does not represent a look-ahead variable command (the result of B1215 is "N"). Since there is a possibility, the received command analysis process is terminated. Further, when the MODE part is not in the normal range (the result of B1202 is "N"), the ACTION part is not in the normal range (the result of B1203 is "N"), or the ACTION part for the MODE part is not the correct combination ( The result of B1204 is "N"), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

[Single-shot command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the details of the one-shot command processing (B1212) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 49) will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a procedure of one-shot command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The staging control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a model designation command indicating the type of the gaming machine (B1301). Then, when the MODE unit represents a model designation command (the result of B1301 is "Y"), the model setting process for setting the type of the gaming machine is executed (B1302), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

The staging control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section represents a RAM initialization command when the MODE section does not represent a model specification command (the result of B1301 is "N") (B1303). ). Then, when the MODE unit represents a RAM initialization command (the result of B1303 is "Y"), a RAM initialization setting process for notifying RAM initialization and the like is executed (B1304), and a single-shot command process is performed. finish.

The staging control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section represents a power failure recovery command when the MODE section does not represent a RAM initialization command (the result of B1303 is “N”). ). Then, when the MODE unit represents a power failure recovery command (the result of B1305 is "Y"), the power failure recovery setting process is executed (B1306), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

If the MODE unit does not represent a power failure recovery command (the result of B1305 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a customer waiting demo command (B1307). .. Then, when the MODE unit represents the customer waiting demo command (the result of B1307 is "Y"), the customer waiting demo setting process is executed (B1308), and the single-shot command process is terminated. In the customer waiting demo setting process, the contents of the customer waiting demo such as the display of the demo movie on the display device 41 are set.

The staging control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section represents the decorative special figure 1 hold number command when the MODE section does not represent the customer waiting demo command (the result of B1307 is "N"). (B1309). Then, when the MODE section represents the decorative special figure 1 hold number command (the result of B1309 is "Y"), the special figure 1 hold information setting process is executed (B1310), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

In the staging control device 300, if the MODE section does not represent the decorative special figure 1 hold number command (the result of B1309 is "N"), then whether or not the MODE section represents the decorative special figure 2 hold number command. (B1311). Then, when the MODE section represents the decorative special figure 2 hold number command (the result of B1311 is "Y"), the special figure 2 hold information setting process is executed (B1312), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

The staging control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section represents the probability information command when the MODE section does not represent the decorative special figure 2 hold number command (the result of B1311 is “N”). (B1313). Then, when the MODE unit represents a probability information command (the result of B1313 is "Y"), the probability information setting process is executed (B1314), and the one-shot command process is terminated.

In the staging control device 300, if the MODE section does not represent a probability information command (the result of B1313 is "N"), then whether or not the MODE section represents an error / invalid / striking instruction system command. Is determined (B1315). Note that there are, for example, an error occurrence command, an illegal release command, a state off command, a state on command, a right-handed instruction notification command, and a left-handed instruction notification command as commands for error / illegal / typing instructions. As a status on command, a signal is generated from the glass frame opening detection switch 63 (glass frame opening error) and a signal is generated from the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main body frame opening detection switch) (main body frame opening error, front frame). There is a command indicating (open error). In addition, the status off command indicates that no error has occurred.

Then, when the MODE section represents an error / illegal / striking instruction system command (the result of B1315 is "Y"), the error, the fraud, or the striking method (right-handed or left-handed) is notified or the notification is canceled. (B1316) is executed for error / invalid / typing setting processing, and the single-shot command processing is terminated.

In the staging control device 300, when the MODE section does not represent an error / invalid command (the result of B1315 is "N"), the MODE section then sends a command for switching the staging mode (processing during special figure display). Etc.) is determined (B1317). Then, when the MODE unit represents a command for switching the effect mode (the result of B1317 is "Y"), the effect mode switching setting process is executed (B1318), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

If the effect control device 300 does not represent a command for switching the effect mode (the result of B1317 is "N"), then the MODE section represents an out ball number command indicating the number of out balls. It is determined whether or not (B1319). Then, when the MODE unit represents the out-ball number command (the result of B1319 is "Y"), the out-ball number reception processing is executed (B1320), and the single-shot command processing is terminated.

In the staging control device 300, if the MODE section does not represent the out-ball count command (the result of B1319 is "N"), then whether or not the MODE section represents the count command (large winning opening count command). (B1321). Then, when the MODE unit represents the count command of the large winning opening switch (the result of B1321 is "Y"), the count information setting process is executed (B1322), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

The staging control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a set value information command (probability set value information command) when the MODE unit does not represent a count command (the result of B1321 is “N”). (B1323). The set value information command is included in the command at the time of power failure recovery in step A1046 of FIG. 6B and the command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1044. Then, when the MODE unit represents the set value information command (the result of B1323 is "Y"), the set value reception processing is executed (B1324), and the single-shot command processing is terminated. In the process of receiving the set value, the set value (probability set value) is stored in a storage unit such as a RAM, and necessary processing is executed.

When the MODE unit does not represent the setting value information command (the result of B1323 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit represents the setting change system command (B1325). As a setting change command, for example, there is a command (A1030) in which the probability setting is being changed. Then, when the MODE unit represents a setting change system command (the result of B1325 is "Y"), the setting change system information setting process is executed (B1326), and the single-shot system command process is terminated. In the setting change information setting process, the contents of the setting change command are stored and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a command for which the probability setting is being changed is received, in the setting change information setting process, the setting changing display for notifying the player that the setting is being changed is displayed on the display device 41.

The staging control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section represents a setting confirmation command when the MODE section does not represent a setting change command (the result of B1325 is “N”) (B1327). .. As a command for setting confirmation, for example, there is a command (A1033) for confirming probability setting. Then, when the MODE unit represents a setting confirmation system command (the result of B1327 is "Y"), the setting confirmation system information setting process is executed (B1328), and the single-shot system command process is terminated. In the setting confirmation information setting process, the contents of the setting confirmation command are stored and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when the command during the probability setting confirmation is received, in the setting confirmation system information setting process, the setting confirmation display for notifying the player that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the display device 41.

When the MODE unit does not represent a setting confirmation command (the result of B1327 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit represents an effect adjustment command (B1329). When the MODE unit represents the effect adjustment command (the result of B1329 is "Y"), the effect adjustment information setting process is executed (B1330), and the single-shot command process is terminated. In the effect adjustment information setting process, the content of the effect adjustment command is stored and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

When the effect control device 300 does not represent the effect adjustment command (the result of B1329 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit represents the symbol stop command (B1331). The symbol stop command includes, for example, a symbol stop command of special figure 1 (decorative special figure 1 stop command) and a symbol stop command of special figure 2 (decorative special figure 2 stop command). Then, when the MODE section represents a command to stop the symbol (the result of B1331 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the command of the MODE section is a normal command (the result of B1331 is “Y”). B1332).

When the command of the MODE section is a normal command (the result of B1332 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 sets the stop mode of the corresponding special figure (B1333), and the game is played after all the symbols are stopped. Set the status flag to the normal status (B1334), and end the one-shot command processing. In the process of B1332, as an example, the game state flag is set to the normal state, but depending on the timing when this process is executed, the game state flag is a flag of "changing", "big hit", and "small hit". Is set.

On the other hand, when the MODE section does not represent the symbol stop command (B1331 result is "N"), or when the MODE section command is not normal (B1332 result is "N"), the effect control device. 300 ends the one-shot command processing.

In addition, although not shown in FIG. 50, when the MODE unit represents the decorative special figure 1 interruption command (A5413) or the decorative special figure 1 restart command (A7311), the staging control device 300 is set to the decorative special figure 1. The process of suspending or resuming the variable display game may be executed.

[Read-ahead design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the details of the look-ahead symbol system command process (B1214) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process (FIG. 49) will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a procedure of pre-reading symbol-based command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

First, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the latest hold information is the information of the special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 start storage), for example, the latest received decorative special figure hold number command is the decorative special figure 1 hold number. It is determined whether or not it is a command (B1601). When the latest hold information is the information of special figure 1 hold (the result of B1601 is "Y"), the look-ahead symbol system command (look-ahead stop symbol command) is set to the special figure 1 look-ahead symbol command area corresponding to the number of special figure 1 hold. Save (B1602).

In the effect control device 300, when the latest hold information is not the information of the special figure 1 hold (the result of B1601 is "N"), that is, the latest received decorative special figure hold number command is the decoration special figure 2 hold number command. In this case, the look-ahead symbol system command (look-ahead stop symbol command) is saved in the special figure 2 look-ahead symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number (B1603).

After steps B1602 and B1603, the effect control device 300 sets a look-ahead variable command reception wait flag indicating that the read-ahead variable command is waiting to be received (B1604). This is because the look-ahead symbol command and the look-ahead variable command are set, and the game control device 100 transmits the look-ahead variable command following the look-ahead symbol command. After that, the look-ahead symbol command processing is terminated.

[Read-ahead variable command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the details of the look-ahead variable command process (B1216) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process (FIG. 49) will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a procedure of pre-reading variation command processing executed by the staging control device 300.

The staging control device 300 first determines whether or not it is waiting for reception of a look-ahead variable command (B1701). When the above-mentioned look-ahead variable command reception wait flag (B1604) is set, it can be determined that the read-ahead variable command is waiting to be received. If the read-ahead variable command is not waiting to be received (the result of B1701 is "N"), the look-ahead variable command processing is terminated. When the read-ahead variable command is waiting to be received (the result of B1701 is "Y"), the look-ahead variable command reception waiting flag is cleared (B1702).

Next, the staging control device 300 (sub-board) sets a look-ahead fluctuation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of holds of the latest hold information symbol (special figure 1 or special figure 2) (B1703), and the look-ahead fluctuation system command is used. Acquires the sub-internal look-ahead fluctuation command MODE unit corresponding to the MODE unit (B1704). Next, the look-ahead variation ACT conversion table is set (B1705), and the sub-internal look-ahead variation command ACT section corresponding to the look-ahead variation command ACTION section (ACT section) is acquired (B1706).

Next, the staging control device 300 determines whether or not the converted MODE unit and the ACT unit (that is, the sub-internal look-ahead fluctuation command MODE unit and the ACT unit) are both other than 0 (B1707). If the command is normal (valid), it is converted to a command other than 0. When both the converted MODE section and ACT section are other than 0 (the result of B1707 is "Y"), the converted command consisting of the converted MODE section and ACT section corresponds to the latest hold information and the number of holds. Save in the look-ahead fluctuation command area (special figure 1 look-ahead change command area or special figure 2 look-ahead change command area) (B1708). Then, the look-ahead command consistency check process is executed (B1709), and it is determined whether or not the combination of the MODE unit and the ACT unit after conversion is normal (B1710).

It should be noted that the time of the first half fluctuation corresponding to the MODE unit changes depending on the number of holds when the hold is changed and the display game is started. Holds vary When starting a display game, if there are no other holds, the first half will be longer, and if a new hold occurs and the number of holds is large, the first half will be shorter. Therefore, even if the time value of the first half variation changes, the MODE section of the received look-ahead variation command is converted into the sub-internal look-ahead variation command MODE section so that the internal command of the effect control device 300 can be handled in the same way.

Further, since the type of reach is not related to the number of holds, the latter half change corresponding to the sub-pre-reading change command ACT section does not depend on the number of holds. However, since there are different types of reach for the same system, if the staging control device 300 is used as it is without converting the ACT section (value of the latter half fluctuation) of the look-ahead fluctuation system command, the number will increase and it will be difficult to check. .. For example, there are different types of normal reach, such as normal reach -1 stop off and normal reach +1 stop off. Therefore, by converting the ACT unit showing the reach of the same system into the same sub-pre-reading variation command ACT unit, the number is reduced and the burden of the check processing such as the pre-reading command consistency check processing is reduced.

Next, in the staging control device 300, when at least one of the converted MODE unit and the ACT unit (that is, the sub-inward look-ahead fluctuation command MODE unit and the ACT unit) is 0 (the result of B1707 is "N"), or If the combination of the MODE unit and the ACT unit after conversion is not normal (the result of B1710 is "N"), it is considered that the command after conversion is abnormal, and the look-ahead variable command processing is terminated.

When the combination of the MODE unit and the ACT unit after conversion is normal (the result of B1710 is "Y"), the staging control device 300 loads the hold information (latest hold information) to be read ahead from the look-ahead fluctuation command area. (B1711), the look-ahead lottery process regarding the latest hold look-ahead effect is executed (B1712). The look-ahead effect includes, for example, a continuous advance notice effect (including a chance look-ahead effect), a look-ahead zone effect, and a hold change advance notice. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the latest hold look-ahead effect (hold change notice, etc.) occurs (B1713). When the latest hold look-ahead effect occurs (the result of B1713 is "Y"), the point information corresponding to the selected look-ahead effect is set (B1714).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the pre-reading effect (holding change notice, etc.) that occurs is an effect that immediately starts (B1715). When the generated look-ahead effect is an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1715 is "Y"), the display corresponding to the selected look-ahead effect is set (B1716). If the pre-reading effect that occurs is not an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1715 is "N"), set and save the display corresponding to the pre-reading effect at the time of hold shift (when the hold display is moved or when the number of holds is reduced) (B1717). ). Then, the look-ahead variable command processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the effect control device 300 does not generate the latest hold look-ahead effect (the result of B1713 is "N"), or when the generated look-ahead effect is not an effect to start immediately (the result of B1715 is "N"). As it is. Ends the look-ahead variable command processing.

[Design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the details of the symbol-based command processing (B1210) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 49) will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a procedure of symbol-based command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 sets a special symbol type corresponding to the MODE unit of the received symbol-based command (decorative special figure 1 command or decorative special figure 2 command) (B1801). The special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2. Then, the symbol type corresponding to the combination of the MODE unit and the ACTION unit (ACT unit) of the symbol system command is set and saved in a predetermined area such as RAM (B1802). Here, since the distribution ratio of the symbols changes between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the symbol type is set by using the table for each MODE. In this embodiment, the symbol type corresponds to an out-of-order symbol, a small hit symbol, a 10R probability variable jackpot symbol, a 4R probability variable jackpot symbol, and a 10R normal jackpot symbol shown in FIG. 28.

[Variable command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the details of the variable command processing (B1206) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 49) will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a procedure of variable command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The staging control device 300 determines whether or not the special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the received variable system command (variable command) is undetermined (B1901). When the special figure type is undecided (the result of B1901 is "Y"), the variable command processing is terminated. If the special symbol type is not undetermined (the result of B1901 is "N"), the combination of the received variable command and symbol command is checked (B1902), and whether the variable command and symbol type are inconsistent. Is determined (B1903). Here, the inconsistency is a contradiction in performing the effect, such as when a design command of a jackpot symbol is received even though a variable command of an outlier is received. If the variable command and the symbol type are inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "Y"), the variable command processing is terminated.

When the effect control device 300 determines the variation pattern type from the variation command (variation command) when the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines the variation pattern type from the variation command (variation command) (B1904). A variable effect setting process for setting a certain variable effect is executed (B1905). It should be noted that there are multiple effects for the same variable command. Subsequently, the special figure changing is set in the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) (B1906), and if the number of pre-reading effects of the continuous advance notice effect (the remaining number of continuous advance notice effects) is not 0, -1 is updated. (B1907).

[Variable staging setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the details of the variation effect setting process (B1905) in the variation system command process (FIG. 54) described above will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variation effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

The staging control device 300 first determines whether or not the variation pattern type is reachless variation (variation that does not reach the reach state) (B2001). When the fluctuation pattern type is non-reach fluctuation (the result of B2001 is "Y"), the first half notice distribution corresponding to the number of production points, model code, special figure type, production mode, and set value (probability setting value) The group address table is set (B2002), and the address of the first half advance notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE part of the variable command (variable command) and the number of reservations of the special figure type is acquired (B2003). In the case of non-reach fluctuation, the fluctuation time is shortened as the number of holds increases, so the address of the table corresponding to the number of holds is acquired.

When the variation pattern type is not reach-free variation (the result of B2001 is "N"), that is, when the variation pattern type is reach variation, the effect control device 300 has a number of effect point points, a model code, a special figure type, and an effect mode. Set the first half advance notice distribution group address table corresponding to the symbol type and set value (probability set value) (B2004), and set the MODE part of the variable command (variable command) and the first half advance notice distribution group table corresponding to the variable pattern type. Get the address of (B2005).

After steps B2003 and B2005, the staging control device 300 performs a lottery of notices that appear during the first half fluctuation (before reach) (B2006). The lottery probability of the notice depends on the set value. Next, set the second half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the number of production points, model code, special symbol type, production mode, symbol type, and set value (probability set value) (B2007), and set the variable command. The address of the second half notice distribution group table corresponding to the ACT section is acquired (B2008), and the notice lottery that appears during the second half fluctuation (during reach) is performed (B2009). The lottery probability of the notice depends on the set value. After that, the content of the variation effect corresponding to the MODE unit and the ACT unit of the variation command (variation command) is determined (B2010). From the variable commands, you can see the variable time and the main reach contents.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines the content of the effect (notice effect) corresponding to the lottery result of the advance notice (B2011). Then, the content of the setting suggestion effect for suggesting the set value (probability set value, setting) is determined by lottery or the like (B2012). It should be noted that the content selected by the lottery includes the content that the setting suggestion effect is not executed. Next, the effect adjustment process for adjusting the effect is executed (B2013). After that, a stop symbol setting process for determining the stop symbol of the decorative special symbol variation display game is executed according to the content of the variation effect such as the reach effect or the advance notice effect (B2014). Here, the decoration stop symbol is concretely determined, such as determining the looseness in the case of the out-of-order symbol.

Next, the effect control device 300 sets the display of the setting suggestion effect (B2015). The display setting of the variable effect such as the reach effect is set (B2016), and the display setting of the advance notice effect is set (B2017). Subsequently, the display setting of the hold reduction (hold shift) corresponding to the special figure type is set. The corresponding display information (B1717) and the like are read out (B2018). Subsequently, a voice number that determines the effect mode (sound output mode) by the sound of the speaker and a decoration number that determines the effect mode by the light emission of the decoration device are set (B2019). The decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) has a plurality of decorative light emitting units (decorative LEDs, etc.) and emits light in a light emission mode (color, light emission timing, etc. of each LED) defined by a decoration number. ..

It is possible to set the voice number and the decoration number not only based on the effect content but also by drawing with a lottery probability according to the set value (probability setting value). In this way, the player can enjoy estimating the set value (probability set value) of the gaming machine 10 from the light emitting mode of the decorative device, that is, the light emitting mode of the decorative light emitting unit (LED).

Next, the staging control device 300 sets the display of the decorative special symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol type (B2020), and sets the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol, identification information) in addition to the first to third special symbols. The display setting of the fourth symbol variation regarding the above (B2021) is performed. The fourth symbol variation is displayed by the lamp display units 1 and 2 (LEDs) of the above-mentioned lamp display device 80 provided in addition to the display device 41, and / or by the display device 41. Subsequently, the accessory operation setting process for setting the operation of the movable accessory (movable body) is executed (B2022), and the variation effect setting process is terminated.

The effect control device 300 can be used to perform the setting suggestion effect (B2015), the variation effect (B2016), and the advance notice effect (B2017) in the variation effect setting process only when the variation display game to be started is the main variation display game. The display may be set, and if the variable display game to be started is a dependent variable display game, the setting suggestion effect (B2015), the variable effect (B2016), and the advance notice effect (B2017) are not executed. It is not necessary to set the display of these effects.

[Production adjustment process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the details of the staging adjustment process (B2013) in the variable staging setting process (FIG. 55) will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the staging adjustment process executed by the staging control device 300.

The staging control device 300 first determines whether or not the special figure type is special figure 1, that is, whether or not the special figure variation display game to be started is the special figure 1 variation display game (B2030). When the special figure type is special figure 1 (the result of B2030 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the effect adjustment command (predetermined information) is received (B2031). When the effect adjustment command is received (the result of B2031 is "Y"), the variation effect of the special figure 1 variation display game is adjusted (B2032). In this embodiment, as an adjustment such as a variable effect, the SP reach effect is changed to an N reach effect or a non-reach effect so that the SP reach effect is not executed (SP reach effect is prohibited), and the background effect is dedicated. Change to the background effect of. After that, the effect adjustment process is completed.

The SP reach effect is an example of a specific effect in which the expectation of the jackpot is higher than the normal expectation, or a specific effect in which the effect time is longer than the normal effect time, such as a variable effect in step B2032. As an adjustment, it may be adjusted so as not to execute a specific effect such as a pseudo continuous effect or a step-up notice. The normal degree of expectation is, for example, the degree of expectation of N reach (several percent or less), and the normal degree of production may be, for example, several tens of seconds.

Here, the degree of expectation corresponds to the probability of becoming a big hit when a certain effect (notice) is selected (executed), the selection rate of the effect when it is a big hit, and the probability when it is not a big hit (when it is off). It can be calculated based on the selection rate of the effect.

The pseudo continuous effect is an effect in which a pseudo variation for varying and temporarily stopping the decorative special symbol (identification information) is performed a predetermined number of times (predetermined step) from the start to the end of one variation display game. The step-up notice is an effect in which a single effect (sub-effect) set in a plurality of stages is sequentially executed from a lower stage (step) to a predetermined stage (predetermined step). Further, as the adjustment of the variation effect in step B2032, the adjustment may be made so as to reduce the above-mentioned predetermined steps (predetermined number of pseudo-variations, predetermined steps) of the pseudo continuous effect and the step-up notice.

On the other hand, when the special figure type is special figure 2 (the result of B2030 is "N"), or when the effect adjustment command is not received (the result of B2031 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines. End the staging adjustment process without doing anything.

Receiving the effect adjustment command when the special figure 1 variable display game starts corresponds to the case where the remaining variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game during the jackpot fluctuation in the normal gaming state is within a predetermined time ( A3623a). Therefore, when the effect adjustment command (predetermined information) is received when the special figure 1 variable display game (main variable display game) starts, the special figure 2 variable display game (subordinate variable display game) is irregular. In preparation for a big hit, even if a specific effect with high expectations or a specific effect for a long time is set in step B2010 etc., in step B2032, such a specific effect (here, SP reach effect) is set to another effect. (Here, N reach effect or no reach effect) can be changed, and the background effect can be changed to a dedicated background effect. In the present embodiment, the SP reach effect, the N reach effect, the no reach effect, and the background effect are display effects on the display screen of the display device 41.

In the normal game state, the player who expected the decorative special figure 1 variable display game (main variable display game) in which a specific effect with high expectation or a specific effect for a long time is executed is the special figure 2 variable display. If the irregular jackpot of the game (subordinate variable display game) causes the decoration special figure 1 variable display game (main variable display game) to suddenly forcibly stop with a disengagement result, a situation may occur in which the player may be surprised or uncomfortable. However, by changing a specific effect related to the decorative special figure 1 variable display game to another effect, it is possible to prevent the specific effect from being executed, preventing the situation of being surprised or uncomfortable, and reducing the interest of the game. Can be prevented. In addition, since the background of the display screen of the display device 41 becomes a dedicated background due to the dedicated background effect, the player is notified that an irregular jackpot of the special figure 2 variable display game (subordinate variable display game) will occur ( (Notice), and the player can prepare for a big hit, such as opening a ball hole 23a in the lower plate 23.

In the present embodiment, even if the SP reach effect is changed to the N reach effect or the no-reach effect, the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game is the same. However, the game control device 100 sets the variation time itself (corresponding to the added value of A5007) of the special figure 1 variation display game from a long variation time corresponding to the SP reach effect to a short variation time corresponding to the N reach effect or the no-reach effect. It is also possible to change to a variable time.

[Stop symbol setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the details of the stop symbol setting process (B2014) in the variation effect setting process (FIG. 55) will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the stop symbol setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

The staging control device 300 first determines whether or not the special figure type is special figure 2, that is, whether or not the special figure variation display game to be started is the special figure 2 variation display game (B2040). When the special figure type is special figure 2 (the result of B2040 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the symbol type of the special figure 2 variation display game is a small hit (B2041). When the symbol type is a small hit (the result of B2041 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the effect adjustment command is received (B2042). When the effect adjustment command is received (the result of B2042 is "Y"), the stop symbol of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is set to the off symbol (the loose pattern that does not correspond to the small hit) (B2043). .. After that, the stop symbol setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the special figure type is special figure 1 (the result of B2040 is "N"), when the symbol type is not a small hit (the result of B2041 is "N"), or the effect adjustment command is received. If not (the result of B2042 is "N"), the staging control device 300 is set to the symbol type (missing symbol, small hit symbol, 10R probability variable jackpot symbol, 4R probability variable jackpot symbol, 10R normal jackpot symbol, etc.) as usual. The stop symbol corresponding to (B2044) is set, and then the stop symbol setting process is terminated.

Receiving the effect adjustment command when the special figure 2 variable display game starts corresponds to the case where the special figure 1 variable display game is undergoing a jackpot fluctuation in a probabilistic change state or a time saving state (A3621b). Therefore, when the effect adjustment command is received when the special figure 2 variable display game (main variable display game) starts, the irregular jackpot (first special) of the special figure 1 variable display game (subordinate variable display game) is received. Adjust the production in preparation for the result). Specifically, even if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (main fluctuation display game) executed by the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52 of the batch display device 50 is a small hit result (second special result), a big prize is won. Even if the mouth is opened, the stop symbol on the effect displayed on the display device 41 is set as an out-of-order symbol that does not correspond to a small hit. In this case, as the stop symbol for the effect of the special figure 2 variable display game, a special symbol may be used in addition to the out-of-order symbol as long as it is a symbol (result display) that does not correspond to the small hit result.

As a result, even though the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit result with a high probability as shown in FIG. 25 (b), a decorative special figure 2 variable display is displayed on the display device 41 immediately before the irregular big hit. The small hit symbol (small hit result) of the game (main fluctuation display game) is not displayed. Therefore, immediately after the small hit symbol of the special figure 2 variable display game is displayed on the display device 41, the special figure 2 variable display game that has just started is forcibly stopped due to an irregular big hit, and the result is stopped. In the display device 41, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player is surprised by giving the impression that the small hit symbol suddenly comes off and changes to the symbol. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game. Further, before the small hit result of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game (main variable display game) is displayed on the display device 41, a part of the small hit symbols (three symbols on the left, right, and middle) are configured. If the symbol (the symbol on the left, the symbol on the right, etc.) is temporarily stopped, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the temporarily stopped symbol is suddenly switched to a symbol corresponding to the irregular jackpot.

In addition, the small hit rush state in which small hits occur frequently continues from the start of the probable change state to the occurrence of the big hit, but it is not happy for the player that the small hit rush state ends due to the irregular big hit. Therefore, even if the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit and the large winning opening is opened, the small hit symbol is not stopped on the display device 41 (the missed symbol or the special symbol that does not correspond to the small hit result is stopped). This makes the player feel uncomfortable, and can detect the irregular big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game and notify the end of the small hit rush state in advance.

As described above, the effect adjustment command in the time saving state or probability change state (A3621b) and the normal game state (A3623a) are the same, but even if the same effect adjustment command is received, the effect control device 300 is in a situation (game). Perform different processes depending on the status). As a result, appropriate processing can be performed according to the situation (game state). In addition, it is not necessary to prepare different effect adjustment commands according to the situation (game state), which simplifies the process. As described above, even if the same effect adjustment command is received, in the time saving state or the probable change state, even if the result of the main fluctuation display game (special figure 2 fluctuation display game) is a small hit result, the display device 41 is displayed. While the stop symbol on the displayed effect is set to the out-of-order symbol (split stitch) (B2043), the variation effect of the main variation display game (Special Figure 1 variation display game) is adjusted in the normal game state (B2032). ..

[Character operation setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the details of the accessory operation setting process (B2022) in the variation effect setting process (FIG. 55) will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the accessory operation setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

The staging control device 300 first determines whether or not the special figure is in the high probability or the time reduction, that is, whether or not it is in the probability variation state or the time reduction state (B2050). Whether or not the special figure type is special figure 1 when the special figure is in high probability or in the time saving (probability change state or time saving state) (the result of B2050 is "Y"), that is, the special figure variation to be started from now on. It is determined whether or not the display game is a special figure 1 variable display game (B2051). When the special figure type is special figure 1 (the result of B2051 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the symbol type of the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit (B2052).

The effect control device 300 operates the movable accessory (upper effect unit 40c, side effect unit 40d, etc.) when the symbol type of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (the result of B2052 is “Y”). Prohibit (B2053). In addition, the movable accessory in operation moves to the initial position.

On the other hand, when the special figure is not in high probability or the time is shortened (in the normal game state) (the result of B2050 is "N"), and when the special figure type is special figure 2 (the result of B2051 is "N"). Alternatively, when the symbol type of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of B2052 is "N"), the effect control device 300 operates the movable accessory according to the advance notice effect and the variable effect as usual. Is set (B2054).

When the special figure 2 variable display game (main variable display game) is forcibly stopped at a symbol that is out of order due to a sudden irregular jackpot, the movable accessory acts as a production of the special figure 2 variable display game (main variable display game). If it is inside, a feeling of strangeness will occur. Therefore, when the special figure 1 variable display game (subordinate variable display game, not long fluctuation) becomes an irregular big hit in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, in preparation for the irregular big hit at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game. In addition to prohibiting the movement of the movable accessory, the movable accessory in operation moves to the initial position to prevent a feeling of strangeness from occurring. In addition, in this embodiment, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (subordinate fluctuation display game) of long fluctuation becomes an irregular big hit in the normal game state, the operation of the movable accessory is prohibited in order to prevent the deterioration of the interest. Although the processing such as is not executed, it may be configured to be executed.

[Hit command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the details of the hit system command process (B1208) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process (FIG. 49) will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing a procedure of hit system command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The staging control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE unit of the received hit system command represents a fanfare (B2101). When the MODE part of the hit system command represents a fanfare (the result of B2101 is "Y"), that is, when the hit system command is a big hit fanfare command or a small hit fanfare command, the fanfare effect setting process for setting the fanfare effect. Is executed (B2102). The fanfare command includes information on the upper limit of the number of rounds for this big hit. Subsequently, fanfare is set in the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) of the current game machine 10 (B2103), and the hit-type command process is terminated. The upper limit of the number of rounds can also be obtained from the symbol type determined from the symbol command (decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern).

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section of the hit command represents a round when the MODE section of the received hit command does not represent a fanfare (the result of B2101 is "N") (the result of B2101 is "N"). B2104). When the MODE unit represents a round (the result of B2104 is "Y"), that is, when the hit system command is a round command or a small hit open command, the effect control device 300 executes the round effect setting process and is currently The game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) of the game machine 10 is set to during the round (B2105, B2106), and the hit system command processing is terminated.

If the MODE section of the received hit command does not represent a round (the result of B2104 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section of the hit command represents an interval (the result of B2104 is "N"). B2107). When the MODE unit represents an interval (the result of B2107 is "Y"), that is, when the hit system command is an interval command, the effect control device 300 executes the interval effect setting process and the game of the current gaming machine 10. The game status flag indicating the status (P machine status) is set during the interval (B2108, B2109), and the hit system command processing is terminated. There is no interval command when the big winning opening is opened only once in a small hit, that is, when the small hit is one round.

If the MODE section of the received hit command does not represent the interval (the result of B2107 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section of the hit command represents the ending (the result of B2107 is "N"). B2110). When the MODE unit represents the ending (the result of B2110 is "Y"), that is, when the hit system command is the ending command or the small hit end screen command, the effect control device 300 sets the ending effect. The setting process is executed, the ending is set in the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) of the current game machine 10 (B2111, B2112), and the hit system command process is terminated.

If the MODE section of the received hit-type command does not represent the ending (the result of B2110 is "N"), the effect control device 300 ends the hit-type command process without executing any process. do.

[Character operation setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the details of the fanfare effect setting process (B2102) in the hit system command process (FIG. 59) will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fanfare effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

The staging control device 300 first determines whether or not it is a big hit that occurred during the special figure high probability or during the time saving, that is, whether or not it is a big hit that occurred during the probability variation state or the time saving state (B2301). Special figure When a big hit occurs during high probability or short time (the result of B2301 is "Y"), the fanfare effect is set as usual, and a large right-handed instruction is displayed on the full screen of the display device 41 (right-handed). Display) is set to be displayed (B2306: normal setting).

If the effect control device 300 is not a big hit that occurred during the special figure high probability or during the time reduction (in the case of a big hit that occurred during the normal game state) (the result of B2301 is "N"), the current big hit is the special figure 2 variation. It is determined whether or not the display game is a big hit (B2302). If the jackpot this time is the jackpot of the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of B2302 is "N"), the fanfare effect is set as usual, and a large right-handed instruction is displayed on the full screen of the display device 41 (right). Set to display (hit display) (B2306: normal setting).

When the effect control device 300 is a big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal gaming state (the result of B2302 is “Y”), whether or not the customer is waiting, that is, the customer waiting demo on the display device 41. Is being executed (B2303). When not waiting for customers (the result of B2303 is "N"), as a special setting 1, a large right-handed instruction display (right-handed display) is displayed on the full screen of the display device 41 without setting the normal fanfare effect. (B2304) (see FIG. 64B (ko)). When waiting for customers (the result of B2303 is "Y"), as a special setting 2, a small right-handed instruction display (right-handed display) reduced in the upper right corner of the display device 41 without setting the normal fanfare effect. Is set to be displayed (B2305) (see FIG. 65A (tsu)).

〔Time chart〕
61 and 62 show the time exemplifying the state of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game executed by the above game control and the effect control in the normal game state and the time saving state / probability change state, respectively. It is a chart.

In the example of FIG. 61 (normal gaming state), the special figure 1 variable display game, which is the main variable display game, is executed a plurality of times during the fluctuation of the special figure 2 variable display game, which is the dependent variable display game. Here, the special figure 2 variable display game is an irregular jackpot because the jackpot flag 2 is set. As described above, the special figure 2 variation display game in the normal gaming state is a long-term variation (long variation, here, a variation time of 590 seconds).

Special Figure 2 When the remaining fluctuation time of the variation display game is within a predetermined time (here, 200 seconds) (the result of A3621a is “Y”), the irregular jackpot effect adjustment flag is set (A3622a). After that, every time the special figure 1 variation display game is started (at the start of each special figure 1 variation display game), the effect adjustment command for adjusting the effect is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. .. Then, when the jackpot result of the special figure 2 variable display game is displayed, the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped with the off result.

In the example of FIG. 62 (time saving state or probable change state), the special figure 2 variable display game, which is the main variable display game, is executed a plurality of times during the fluctuation of the special figure 1 variable display game, which is a dependent variable display game. Here, the special figure 1 variable display game is an irregular jackpot because the jackpot flag 1 is set. The special figure 1 variation display game in the time reduction state or the probability variation state is not a long-term variation (long variation) even in a slave variation display game, but has a variation time of, for example, 4 seconds. Therefore, the number of main fluctuation display games executed during the slave fluctuation display game, which is an irregular jackpot, is higher in the example of FIG. 62 (time saving state or probable change state) than in the example of FIG. 61 (normal gaming state). Few.

After the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, which is an irregular jackpot, every time the special figure 2 variable display game is started (at the start of each special figure 2 variable display game), an effect adjustment command for adjusting the effect is issued. It is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. Then, when the jackpot result of the special figure 1 variable display game is displayed, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped with the off result.

If the special figure 2 variation display game executed a plurality of times in FIG. 62 results in a small hit, the measurement of the fluctuation time by the special figure 1 game processing timer (update of the special figure 1 game processing timer) is interrupted. As a result, the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted. After that, the special figure 1 variable display game that was interrupted after the end of the small hit operation related to the special figure 2 variable display game can be restarted. Even during the interruption, the fluctuation of the special symbol (identification information) itself may apparently continue in the special figure 1 display device 51 and the display device 41.

[Example of production when irregular jackpot occurs from normal game state]
FIG. 63 is a time chart showing an example of an effect realized by the above-mentioned game control and effect control, in which an irregular jackpot occurs from a normal game state.

FIG. 63 (a) corresponds to a part of FIG. 61, but during the fluctuation of the special figure 2 variable display game (subordinate variable display game) which is an irregular jackpot, the special figure 1 variable display game (main variable display game). ) Is executed multiple times. After the start of the special figure 2 variable display game which is an irregular big hit, the special figure 1 variable display game may be started n times (once in FIG. 63) by the time T1.

At time T1, during the fluctuation of the special figure 1 variable display game, the remaining variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes an irregular jackpot, and the remaining variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a predetermined time, and the irregular jackpot effect adjustment during the special figure 2 variable display game. The flag is set (A3622a). From time T1 to the end of the special figure 2 variation display game, at the start of each special figure 1 variation display game, the effect adjustment command (A3623a) for adjusting the effect and the variation command (A5012, A5013) including information on the variation pattern. ) Are both transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. On the other hand, before the time T1, at the start of each special figure 1 variation display game, the variation command is transmitted, but the effect adjustment command is not transmitted.

On the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) of the special figure 1 variable display game (main variable display game) started before the time T1 is displayed as a large symbol (large symbol) in the center of the display screen. On the other hand, after the time T1, the effect control device 300 does not execute a specific effect (SP reach effect, pseudo continuous effect, etc.) with a higher expectation of a big hit or a longer effect time than usual by receiving the effect adjustment command. At the same time as setting, the background of the display screen of the display device 41 is changed to the dedicated background (B2032). For example, as a dedicated background image (predetermined image, predetermined background image), a large character image of "great chance" is displayed in the center of the display screen, and a special image is displayed around the character display. Further, the staging control device 300 displays the decorative special symbol (identification information) of the special figure 1 variable display game as a small symbol (small symbol) at the edge of the display screen so as not to interfere with the dedicated background.

The decorative special symbol (identification information) of the special figure 2 variable display game (subordinate variable display game) is displayed as a small symbol (small symbol) at the edge of the display screen of the display device 41, but it can be configured not to be displayed. Is.

After that, at time T2, the special figure 2 variable display game, which is an irregular big hit, ends, the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed (big hit is confirmed), and the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped with the missed symbol. Further, at the time T2, the symbol stop command (decorative special figure 1 stop command and decorative special figure 2 stop command) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. There may be no change in the dedicated background of the display device 41.

After that, at time T3, the jackpot fanfare command (A5809) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the staging control device 300, and the jackpot fanfare time (A5813) starts. Further, at the time T3, the effect control device 300 switches the display on the display screen of the display device 41 from the dedicated background to the large right-handed instruction display 657 (right-handed display) on the full screen by receiving the jackpot fanfare command. Special setting of B2304 1). The jackpot fanfare effect that is normally performed is not performed.

After that, at time T4, even if the jackpot fanfare time elapses, there is a waiting time for the game ball to pass through the gate 34 (so-called pounding gate) by right-handed hitting, and the jackpot state (opening of the jackpot). (Round)) (The result of A6003 is "N"). This prevents a big hit state regardless of the player's intention. If the game ball passes through the normal drawing start gate 34 by right-handed during the big hit fanfare time, the big hit state is reached when the big hit fanfare time elapses (waiting time for passing through the gate = 0).

After that, at time T5, when the game ball passes through the normal drawing start gate 34 by the player starting right-handed, the big hit round starts and the big winning opening is opened (A6004-A6027). Further, at time T5, the round command (A6011) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 that receives the round command is a big hit instead of the large right-handed instruction display 657 on the full screen. Start the round production of.

FIG. 63 (b) illustrates a case where a customer is waiting during a change in the special figure 2 variable display game, which is an irregular jackpot. That is, before the time T2 when the result of the irregular jackpot is confirmed and displayed, the special figure 1 variable display game (main variable display game) is not executed during the fluctuation of the special figure 2 variable display game (subordinate variable display game). At the same time, the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0. Therefore, the customer waiting state is in the state of waiting for customers even during the fluctuation of the special figure 2 variation display game, and the customer waiting demo such as the display of the demo movie is executed on the display screen of the display device 41 (A3419, B1308). If the special figure 1 variable display game is in the big hit state before the customer waiting state, three numbers such as the big hit decoration special symbol ("3,3,3") are available as a customer waiting demo. Things) may be displayed. Even after the time T2 has passed, there is no change in the waiting state until the time T3.

In this embodiment, even if the subordinate variation display game (here, the special figure 2 variation display game) is executed, the main variation display game (here, the special figure 1 variation display game) is not changing, and If the number of holdings related to the main variation display game (here, the number of holdings in Special Figure 1) is 0, the game is in a customer waiting state (A3401, A3406, A3416 in FIG. 16).

At time T3, the jackpot fanfare command is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. Upon receiving the jackpot fanfare command, the staging control device 300 ends the customer waiting demo on the display screen of the display device 41, and displays a small right-handed instruction display 658 (reduced right-handed display) in the upper right corner of the display screen (reduced right-handed display). B2305 special setting 2). The fanfare effect that is normally performed is not performed.

After that, as in the case of FIG. 63 (a), the jackpot fanfare time from time T3 to time T4 and the waiting time for passing through the gate from time T4 to time T5 elapse, and at time T5, the game ball is played. Upon passing through the start gate 34, the effect control device 300 that has received the round command starts the round effect of the big hit.

In the example of FIG. 63 (b), there is a high possibility that the player is not in the vicinity of the gaming machine 10 (unmanned state) while waiting for a customer in the normal gaming state (low probability and no time reduction), so that the time is required. A small right-handed instruction display 658 that is inconspicuous from T3 to time T5 is displayed on the display device 41. If a large and conspicuous right-handed instruction is displayed, an unrelated person (walking in the amusement park) who has not generated a start prize (a prize for the normal variable prize device 37), which is an irregular big hit, in an unmanned state. A person or the like) notices a conspicuous right-handed instruction display and makes a right-handed ball to pass the game ball through the normal drawing start gate 34, resulting in an unfair situation in which a big hit round game is performed. However, by displaying the small right-handed instruction display 658, which is inconspicuous from the time T3 to the time T5, on the display device 41, it is possible to prevent an unfair situation by making it difficult for an unrelated person to notice the right-handed instruction display.

Similar to FIG. 63 (b), FIG. 63 (c) also illustrates a case where a customer is waiting during the fluctuation of the special figure 2 variable display game, which is an irregular jackpot, but the round from the jackpot fanfare command transmission. Between the time T3 and the time T5, which is the period until the command is transmitted, the special figure 1 hold (first start memory, special figure 1 start memory) is generated by winning the start winning opening 36 at the time Ta. Even if the special figure 1 hold occurs between the time T3 and the time T5, the special figure 1 variable display game does not start because the big hit state occurs.

At the time Ta after the irregular jackpot is confirmed (special figure 2 game processing number is "3"), the right-handed instruction notification command is issued to the game control device due to the occurrence of special figure 1 hold (winning to the start winning opening 36). It is transmitted from 100 to the effect control device 300 (A2705, A2706). Upon receiving this right-handed instruction notification command, the staging control device 300 displays the right-handed instruction display 658 (reduced right-handed display), which was displayed small in the upper right corner of the display screen after the time T3, with a large right-handed display on the full screen. Switch to the instruction display 657 (right-handed display) (B1316). The fact that the special figure 1 hold (winning to the start winning opening 36) has occurred is not an unmanned state, and the player who caused the special figure 1 hold directly hits the right according to the large right-handed instruction display 657. A game ball is passed through the normal figure start gate 34 so that a big hit round game can be performed.

[Screen transition 1 (i)]
FIGS. 64A and 64B are examples of screen transition diagrams showing the display screens of the display device 41 in chronological order, and show a case where an irregular jackpot occurs from a normal gaming state. 64A and 64B correspond to a part of FIG. 63 (a).

(A) of FIG. 64A is a display screen immediately before starting the special figure 1 variable display game (decorative special figure 1 variable display game) which is the main variable display game in the normal gaming state. In the variable display area 610 in the center of the display screen, the out-of-order stop symbol "9, 4, 6" of the previous special figure 1 variable display game is displayed in large size. In the variable display area 615 at the right end of the display screen, the special figure 2 variable display game (decorative special figure 2 variable display game), which is a secondary variable display game in the normal gaming state, is variablely displayed. Here, in the special figure 2 variable display game that is changing, the big hit result (irregular big hit) is displayed later. In addition, the display device 41 may be configured to display only the jackpot result (big hit symbol) without displaying the fluctuation of the slave variation display game (here, the special figure 2 variation display game) and the loss result. Follow-up variable display The variable display of the game may be performed with only one decorative special symbol.

Further, in (a), the first predetermined image 675 showing the execution state of the special figure 1 variable display game is a symbol “x” indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped, and is a special figure. 2 The second predetermined image 676 showing the execution state of the variable display game is a symbol “◯” indicating that the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (changing). The second predetermined image 676 "◯" may blink as the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol). In the first display unit 620 of the display screen, the special figure 1 hold display 620a (special figure 1 hold display) corresponding to the special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 start memory) which is the execution right of the special figure 1 variable display game (main variable display game). 1 Start memory display) is displayed four times. Nothing is displayed in the reserved digestion area 640. Further, the special figure 1 hold number display 650 displays the current special figure 1 hold number "4", and the special figure 2 hold number display 660 displays the current special figure 2 hold number "4".

Subsequently, in (a), the special figure 1 variable display game, which is the main variable display game, and the special figure 2 variable display game, which is the secondary variable display game, are both being executed (changing). Further, the first predetermined image 675 is a symbol "○" indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed, and the second predetermined image 676 is the special figure 2 variable display game being executed. It is a symbol "○" indicating that. The first predetermined image 675 "○" and the second predetermined image 676 "○" may blink as the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol).

Further, in (a), in the first display unit 620, each special figure 1 hold display 620a is moved to the display position of the special figure 1 hold display 620a on the left side (hold shift). Further, the special figure 1 hold display 620a located at the left end of the first display unit 620 has moved from the first display unit 620 to the hold digestion area 640 (hold shift). The special figure 1 hold display 620a of the first display unit 620 is a start memory display (hold display before change) corresponding to the start memory related to the change display game before execution, whereas the special figure of the hold digestion area 640 is 1 Hold display 620b is a start memory display (holding display during change) corresponding to the start memory related to the variable display game being executed. Further, the special figure 1 hold number display 650 displays the current special figure 1 hold number "3", and the special figure 2 hold number display 660 displays the current special figure 2 hold number "4".

The special figure 1 variable display game, which is the main variable display game, is displayed in the first display mode, and the special figure 2 variable display game, which is the secondary variable display game, is displayed in the second display mode. Here, the first display mode is a display mode larger than the second display mode, and is displayed larger in the center of the display screen as the main display, and the second display mode is the edge of the display screen as the sub display. It is a display mode that is displayed small in the section. That is, the fluctuating decorative special symbol (decorative symbol) is a large symbol in the first display mode and a small symbol in the second display mode. In addition, the first display mode is a mode in which a decorative special symbol (decorative symbol) is formed by a character, a number, and a frame and is displayed in a variable manner, and the second display mode is a mode in which the decorative special symbol (decorative symbol) is formed only by numbers. It may be displayed in a variable manner. Further, each of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may be displayed in two types of modes, a first display mode and a second display mode.

Next, in (c), the special figure 1 variable display game, which is the main variable display game, is in the reach state (normal reach), and temporarily stops at the same symbol "3" in the variable display area 610. Is displayed.

After that, in (d), since the system (type) of the reach effect related to the special figure 1 variable display game is SP reach (for example, SP1 reach), the reach evolves from the normal reach state to SP3 reach, and the display screen. Along with the movie effect (movie effect) being executed in the center of, the left and right symbols of the special figure 1 variable display game move to the upper corner of the screen.

Note that (d) corresponds to the display screen at time T1 in FIG. 63 (a), and the remaining variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game, which is an irregular jackpot, is a predetermined time. Since the SP reach effect is an effect related to the special figure 1 variable display game (main variable display game) started before the time T1, it is executed as it is without being switched to another effect (without being prohibited). Will be done.

Next, in (e), the special figure 1 variation display game is completed, and in the variation display area 610 in the center of the display screen, the out-of-order stop symbol "3, 4, 3" is a large symbol (large symbol, first). 1 Display mode, main display). Further, the first predetermined image 675 is a symbol “x” indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped, and the special figure 1 hold display 620b (changing hold display) of the hold digestion area 640 is It's gone.

Subsequently, in (f), the special figure 1 variable display game is started, and both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are in the running state. The first predetermined image 675 has a symbol “◯”, and the second predetermined image 676 has a symbol “◯”. Due to the hold shift, the special figure 1 hold display 620b is displayed in the hold digestion area 640 as the change hold display. Further, the number of special figure 1 holdes shown in the special figure 1 hold number display 650 is reduced from "3" to "2".

(F) Special Figure 1 When the effect control device 300 receives the effect adjustment command at the start of the variable display game, a specific effect with high expectation such as SP reach effect or a specific effect with a long effect time is performed. Is not executed, and on the display screen of the display device 41, an image of a dedicated background consisting of a large character image of "great chance" in the center of the display screen and a special image (indicated by a diagonal line) around the large character image is displayed. In addition, the special figure 1 variable display game is variablely displayed in the variable display area 613 at the left end of the display screen with a small decorative special symbol (small symbol) in the second display mode (sub-display) so as not to interfere with the dedicated background. To. In addition, when it becomes a dedicated background, the frame of the hold display 620a, 620b and the hold digestion area 640, which are the displays related to the hold, may be erased.

Subsequently, in (g) of FIG. 64B, the special figure 1 variation display game is completed, and the detachment stop symbol "8, 3, 5" is a small symbol (small symbol) in the variation display area 613 at the left end of the display screen. , Second display mode, sub-display). Further, the first predetermined image 675 is a symbol “x”, and the special figure 1 hold display 620b of the hold digestion area 640 has disappeared.

Next, in (c), the special figure 1 variable display game is started, and the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are both being executed (changing). The first predetermined image 675 has a symbol “◯”, and the second predetermined image 676 has a symbol “◯”. Due to the hold shift, the special figure 1 hold display 620b is displayed in the hold digestion area 640 as the change hold display. Further, the number of special figure 1 holdes shown in the special figure 1 hold number display 650 is reduced from "2" to "1". Special Figure 1 At the start of the variable display game, the effect control device 300 receives an effect adjustment command to continuously perform a specific effect with high expectations such as SP reach effect or a specific effect with a long effect time. Is not executed and a dedicated background is displayed. Further, the special figure 1 variable display game is variablely displayed with a small decorative special symbol (small symbol) in the variable display area 613 at the left end of the display screen.

Subsequently, (ke) corresponds to the display screen at the time T2 in FIG. 63 (a). Here, the special figure 2 variable display game ends with a big hit result (irregular big hit), and the big hit stop symbol "5, 5, 5" is displayed with a small symbol in the variable display area 615 at the right end of the display screen. To. It should be noted that the jackpot stop symbol may be displayed as "○, ○, ○" or the like. Further, the special figure 1 variation display game is forcibly terminated as a result of disconnection, and the detachment stop symbol "7, 4, 9" is displayed as a small symbol in the variation display area 613 at the left end of the display screen. Further, the first predetermined image 675 and the second predetermined image 676 are represented by the symbol “x”, and the special figure 1 hold display 620b of the hold digestion region 640 has disappeared.

Next, (ko) corresponds to the display screen at time T3 in FIG. 63 (a). Here, in response to the reception of the jackpot fanfare command by the staging control device 300, a dedicated background image such as a character image of "big chance" is displayed on the display screen as a large right-handed instruction display 657 (right). It is switched to the image of the hit display). After that, the jackpot fanfare time and the waiting time for passing through the gate elapse.

Next, (sa) corresponds to the display screen at time T5 in FIG. 63 (a). Here, the image of the large right-handed instruction display 657 (right-handed display) on the full screen corresponds to the reception of the round command on the effect control device 300, and the image of the big hit round effect on the full screen (video). Can be switched to.

As described above, in the normal gaming state, the special figure 2 variable display game (subordinate variable display game) that is the big hit result (first special result) is changing, and the remaining variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game is changing. When the time is equal to or less than the predetermined time, the effect adjustment command (predetermined information) is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when each special figure 1 variation display game (main variation display game) starts. Then, the staging control device 300 corresponds to the received staging adjustment command (predetermined information), and corresponds to a specific staging (SP reach or pseudo-continuous) which is a staging with a higher expectation than usual or a staging for a longer time than usual. Set not to execute (directing, etc.). As a result, in FIGS. 64A (f) to 64B (c), the production during or for a long time with high expectation related to each special figure 1 variable display game (main variable display game) is not executed. 2 It is possible to prevent the player from being surprised when the variable display game suddenly becomes an irregular jackpot.

Further, the irregular jackpot can be notified by displaying the dedicated background in FIGS. 64A (f) to 64B (c). Furthermore, since the dedicated background is displayed after a considerable amount of time has passed from the start of the special figure 2 variable display game (before FIG. 64A (a)), it is a special figure that the player recognizes the irregular jackpot. 2 Variable display Significantly delayed from the start of the game. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the launch of the game ball immediately after the start of the special figure 2 variable display game, and the game is enjoyed for a considerable period of time from the start of the special figure 2 variable display game. Can be continued.

[Screen transition 1 (ii)]
FIGS. 65A and 65B are examples of screen transition diagrams showing the display screens of the display device 41 in chronological order, and irregular jackpots occur while waiting for customers in a normal gaming state (low probability of special figure and no time reduction). The case of doing is shown. 65A and 65B correspond to FIGS. 63 (b) and 63 (c), respectively.

In (ta) of FIG. 65A, a customer waiting demo such as displaying a demo movie is executed on the display screen. The first predetermined image 675 is a symbol “x” indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped, and the second predetermined image 676 is the special figure 2 variable display game being executed (changing). It is a symbol "○" indicating that. The special figure 1 hold number display 650 displays the current special figure 1 hold number "0", and the special figure 2 hold number display 660 displays the current special figure 2 hold number "1". In this embodiment, even if the special figure 2 variable display game (subordinate variable display game) is changing, the special figure 1 variable display game (main variable display game) is not executed and the special figure 1 hold number is 0. If so, it will be in a customer waiting state. Further, it is also possible to configure the display device 41 (variable display area 615) not to display the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, which is a dependent variable display game.

Next, (ch) corresponds to the display screen at the time T2 in FIG. 63 (b), and the special figure 2 variable display game (subordinate variable display game) ends, and the jackpot stop symbol "5, 5, 5" Is displayed. It should be noted that the jackpot stop symbol may be displayed as "○, ○, ○" or the like.

Next, (tsu) corresponds to the display screen at the time T3 in FIG. 63 (b), and unlike the large right-handed instruction display 657 in FIG. 64B (ko), the customer waiting demo is completed on the display screen. , A small right-handed instruction display 658 is displayed inconspicuously in the upper right corner of the display screen. As a result, an unrelated person (such as a person walking in the game hall) is prevented from noticing that a big hit has occurred in the game machine 10. When the gaming machine 10 is not unmanned and the player is seated, the right-handed instruction display 658 is displayed in a size that the player notices.

Next, (te) corresponds to the display screen at the time T5 in FIG. 63 (b), and the round effect of the big hit is started. The round effect of the big hit is displayed small so as not to be conspicuous in the predetermined area 41a of the display screen, unlike the round effect of FIG. 64B. This prevents an unrelated person (such as a person walking in the game hall) from noticing that a big hit has occurred in the game machine 10. In addition, as in (Sa) of FIG. 64B, a big hit round effect may be displayed on the full screen.

(Ta) to (tsu) in FIG. 65B are the same as (ta) to (tsu) in FIG. 65A, but in (tsu') of FIG. 65B, corresponding to the time Ta in FIG. 63 (c). With the occurrence of the special figure 1 hold (winning to the start winning opening 36), the small right-handed instruction display 658 (reduced right-handed display) is changed to the large right-handed instruction display 657 (right-handed) on the full screen. Display). This suggests a right-handed strike to the player who caused the special figure 1 hold.

After that, in (Te') of FIG. 65B, corresponding to the time T5 of FIG. 63 (c), a big hit round effect is displayed on the full screen as in (Sa) of FIG. 64B. Therefore, the round effect is displayed so as to be conspicuous to the player who has generated the special figure 1 hold.

[Example of production when an irregular jackpot occurs from a time-saving state or a probable change state]
FIG. 66 is a time chart showing an example of an effect realized by the above-mentioned game control and effect control, in which an irregular big hit occurs from a time saving state or a probability change state (small hit rush state).

FIG. 66A corresponds to a part of FIG. 62, but the special figure 2 variable display game is executed a plurality of times during the fluctuation of the special figure 1 variable display game which is an irregular jackpot. In the present embodiment, the decorative special symbol (identification information) of the special figure 2 variable display game (main variable display game) is displayed as a large symbol (large symbol) in the center of the display screen of the display device 41. On the other hand, the decorative special symbol of the special figure 1 variable display game (subordinate variable display game) is displayed as a small symbol (small symbol) at the edge of the display screen of the display device 41, but the special figure 1 variable display game is not displayed. It can also be configured.

Since it is in a time-saving state or a probable change state, the movement of the movable accessory is prohibited at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, which is an irregular jackpot, and the movable accessory in operation is returned to the initial position (B2053). ).

From the start to the end of the special figure 1 variable display game, which is an irregular jackpot, at the start of each special figure 2 variable display game, both the effect adjustment command (A3621b) and the variable command (A5012, A5013) are sent from the game control device 100. It is transmitted to the effect control device 300. On the other hand, before the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, which is an irregular jackpot, the variable command is transmitted at the start of each special figure 2 variable display game, but the effect adjustment command is not transmitted.

Before the start of the special figure 1 variable display game (subordinate variable display game), which is an irregular jackpot, the effect adjustment command is not received (the result of A3620b is "N", the result of B2042 is "N"), so the effect control device. The 300 sets a stop symbol of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game in the display device 41 according to the symbol type (missing symbol, small hit symbol, big hit symbol, etc.) (B2044).

However, after the start of the special figure 1 variable display game (subordinate variable display game), which is an irregular jackpot, the effect control device 300 receives the effect adjustment command at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game (main variable display game). (The result of A3620b is "Y", the result of B2042 is "Y"). Therefore, the effect control device 300 displays even if the result of the special figure 2 variation display game executed by the second special figure variation display unit 52 of the batch display device 50 is a small hit result and the big winning opening is opened. Decorative decoration on the device 41 Special figure 2 The stop symbol of the variable display game is set to the off symbol (the symbol that does not correspond to the small hit result) (B2043). This allows the player to prepare for an irregular jackpot.

After that, at time T2, the special figure 1 variable display game, which is an irregular big hit, ends, the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed (big hit is confirmed), and the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped with the missed symbol. Further, at the time T2, the symbol stop command (decorative special figure 1 stop command and decorative special figure 2 stop command) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. At time T2, the decoration special symbol of the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped and displayed from the variable state, but is displayed as a large off-target symbol (large symbol).

After that, at time T3, the jackpot fanfare command (A5809) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the staging control device 300, and the jackpot fanfare time (A5813) starts. Further, at the time T3, the effect control device 300 displays the jackpot fanfare effect on the display screen of the display device 41 and displays a large right-handed instruction display 657 on the full screen by receiving the jackpot fanfare command (B2306). ..

After that, at time T4, the jackpot fanfare time elapses and the jackpot fanfare production ends, but there is a waiting time for the game ball to pass through the normal drawing start gate 34 (so-called pounding gate) by right-handed, and the jackpot state. (Opening of the big winning opening (round)) does not start (the result of A6003 is "N"). This prevents a big hit state regardless of the player's intention. If the game ball passes through the normal drawing start gate 34 by right-handed during the big hit fanfare time, the big hit state is reached when the big hit fanfare time elapses (waiting time for passing through the gate = 0).

After that, at time T5, when the game ball passes through the normal drawing start gate 34 by the player starting right-handed, the big hit round starts and the big winning opening is opened (A6004-A6027). Further, at time T5, the round command (A6011) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 that receives the round command is a big hit instead of the large right-handed instruction display 657 on the full screen. Start the round production of.

FIG. 66B exemplifies a case where a customer is waiting during a change in the special figure 1 variable display game (subordinate variable display game), which is an irregular jackpot. That is, before the time T2 when the result of the irregular jackpot is confirmed and displayed, the special figure 2 variable display game (main variable display game) is not executed during the fluctuation of the special figure 1 variable display game (subordinate variable display game). At the same time, the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 is 0. Therefore, the customer waiting state is in the state of waiting for customers even during the fluctuation of the special figure 1 variation display game, and the customer waiting demo such as the display of the demo movie is executed on the display screen of the display device 41 (A3514, B1308). If the special figure 2 variable display game is in the big hit state before the customer waiting state, three numbers such as the big hit decoration special symbol ("3,3,3") are available as a customer waiting demo. Things) may be displayed. Even after the time T2 has passed, there is no change in the waiting state until the time T3.

In this embodiment, even if the subordinate variation display game (here, the special figure 1 variation display game) is executed, the main variation display game (here, the special figure 2 variation display game) is not changing, and If the number of holdings related to the main variation display game (the number of holdings in Special Figure 2) is 0, the game is in a customer waiting state (A3501, A3502, A3512 in FIG. 17).

At time T3, the jackpot fanfare command is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. Upon receiving the jackpot fanfare command, the effect control device 300 ends the customer waiting demo on the display screen of the display device 41, displays the fanfare effect on the display screen of the display device 41, and gives a large right-handed instruction on the full screen. Display 657 is displayed (B2306).

After that, after the time T3, the same effect as in the case of FIG. 63 (a) is executed.

In the example of FIG. 66 (b), since there is a high possibility that the player is in the vicinity of the gaming machine 10 while waiting for a customer in a time-saving state or a probable change state, a large right-handed instruction display is conspicuously displayed from time T3 to time T5. 657 is displayed on the display device 41.

Similar to FIG. 66 (b), FIG. 66 (c) also illustrates a case where a customer is waiting during a change of the special figure 1 variable display game (subordinate variable display game) which is an irregular jackpot. During the time T3 and time T5, which is the period from the jackpot fanfare command transmission to the round command transmission, in time Ta, special figure 2 is held by winning the normal variable winning device 37 (second start memory, special figure 2 start memory). ) Has occurred. Even if the special figure 2 hold occurs between the time T3 and the time T5, the special figure 2 variable display game does not start because the big hit state occurs. Unlike FIG. 63 (c), the game control device 100 does not transmit the right-handed instruction notification command because the right-handed state is already in the waiting state for the customer in the time-saving state or the probable change state. After the time T3, the same effect as in the case of FIG. 63 (b) is executed.

[Screen transition 2 (i)]
67A, 67B, and 67C are examples of screen transition diagrams showing the display screens of the display device 41 in chronological order, and show a case where an irregular jackpot occurs from a time-saving state or a probable change state. 67A, 67B, and 67C correspond to a part of FIG. 66 (a).

FIG. 67A (A) is a display screen immediately before starting the special figure 2 variable display game (decorative special figure 2 variable display game) which is the main variable display game in the time saving state or the probable change state. In the variable display area 610 in the center of the display screen, the out-of-order stop symbol "3, 4, 6" of the previous special figure 2 variable display game is displayed in large size. In the variable display area 613 at the left end of the display screen, the special figure 1 variable display game (decorative special figure 1 variable display game), which is a dependent variable display game in a time-saving state or a probable change state, is variablely displayed. Here, in the special figure 1 variable display game that is changing, the result of the deviation is displayed later. The display device 41 may be configured to display only the jackpot result (big hit symbol) without displaying the deviation result from the fluctuation of the slave variation display game (here, the special figure 1 variation display game), or the slave variation. Display The variable display of the game may be performed with only one decorative special symbol.

Further, in (A), the first predetermined image 675 is a symbol “x” indicating that the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped, and the second predetermined image 676 is the special figure 1 variable display game. Is a symbol "○" indicating that is being executed (changing). In the second display unit 630 of the display screen, the special figure 2 hold display 630a (special figure 2 hold display) corresponding to the special figure 2 hold (special figure 2 start memory) which is the execution right of the special figure 2 variable display game (main variable display game). 2 Start memory display) is displayed four times. Nothing is displayed in the reserved digestion area 640. Further, the special figure 1 hold number display 650 displays the current special figure 1 hold number "4", and the special figure 2 hold number display 660 displays the current special figure 2 hold number "4".

Subsequently, in (i), the special figure 1 variable display game, which is the main variable display game, and the special figure 2 variable display game, which is the secondary variable display game, are both being executed (changing). The first predetermined image 675 has the symbol “◯”, and the second predetermined image 676 also has the symbol “◯”.

Further, in (i), in the second display unit 630, each special figure 2 hold display 630a is moved to the display position of the special figure 2 hold display 630a on the right side (hold shift). Further, the special figure 2 hold display 630a located at the right end of the second display unit 630 has moved from the second display unit 630 to the hold digestion area 640 (hold shift). The special figure 2 hold display 630a of the second display unit 630 is a start memory display (pre-change hold display 630a) corresponding to the start memory related to the change display game before execution, whereas the hold digestion area 640 is special. FIG. 2 Hold display 630b is a start storage display (holding display during change) corresponding to the start memory related to the variable display game being executed. Further, the special figure 1 hold number display 650 displays the current special figure 1 hold number "4", and the special figure 2 hold number display 660 displays the current special figure 2 hold number "3".

The special figure 2 variable display game, which is the main variable display game, is displayed large in the center of the display screen as the main display in the first display mode (large symbol), and the special figure 1 variable display game, which is the secondary variable display game, is In the second display mode (small symbol), it is displayed small as a sub display in the variable display area 613 at the left end of the display screen.

After that, in (c), the result of the special figure 2 variable display game, which is the main variable display game, becomes the small hit result, and the small hit symbol (small hit stop symbol) "1, 2, 3" is derived, and the display screen is displayed. It is displayed large as a large pattern at the top. The small hit here is a normal small hit. The result of the special figure 2 variable display game, which is the main variable display game, becomes a small hit result, so that the special figure 1 variable display game, which is the secondary variable display game, is interrupted (the update of the special figure 1 game processing timer is updated). Stop). However, in the variation display area 613 at the left end of the display screen, the variation itself of the decorative special figure 1 variation display game apparently continues.

In (U), the small hit fanfare effect is executed in the center of the display screen. As a part of the small hit fanfare production, a blessing production is executed to congratulate and notify the occurrence of the small hit, such as "Congratulations on the small hit" in the character display. In addition, as a small hit fanfare effect, entering the "tiger mode" as an effect mode corresponding to the small hit state is notified as "tiger mode entry". Since it is in a small hit state, a right-handed instruction display 659 of an intermediate size is displayed at the upper right of the display screen in order to recommend right-handed to the player.

The first predetermined image 675 is a symbol “Δ” indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is suspended, and the second predetermined image 676 is that the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped. It is a symbol "x" indicating that. Nothing is displayed in the reserved digestion area 640.

Subsequently, in (e), the small hit medium effect is executed by displaying a character in the center of the display screen. The small hit medium production is a production corresponding to the production mode "tiger mode". Further, although not shown, the small hit ending effect may be executed at the end of the small hit state.

After that, in (O), the small hit state ends, the hold shift is executed in the second display unit 630, and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, which is the main variable display game, starts in the variable display area 610 by the main display. do. Further, the special figure 1 variable display game, which is a dependent variable display game, is restarted (the update of the special figure 1 game processing timer is restarted), but in the variable display area 613 at the left end of the display screen, the fluctuation itself is performed even during the interruption. There is no change as it seems to continue.

Further, in (O), the first predetermined image 675 is represented by the symbol “◯”, and the second predetermined image 676 is also represented by the symbol “◯”. The special figure 1 hold number display 650 displays the current special figure 1 hold number "4", and the special figure 2 hold number display 660 displays the current special figure 2 hold number "2".

After that, in (ka), in the variable display area 613, the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped and displayed with the outlier symbol “9, 5, 2”. The first predetermined image 675 is a symbol “x” indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped. However, since the special figure 2 variable display game is not affected by the deviation result of the special figure 1 variable display game, it fluctuates as it is in the variable display area 610 at the center of the display screen.

Subsequently, in (ki), the special figure 1 variable display game, which is an irregular jackpot, is started in the variable display area 613. Here, the first predetermined image 675 changes to the symbol "○" indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed, and the special figure 1 hold number display 650 changes from "4" to "3". do.

After that, in (ku), the special figure 2 variable display game results in an outlier, and the game stops at the outlier symbol "7, 9, 2" in the variable display area 610. Special Figure 2 The variable display game is marked with a symbol "x" indicating that it is stopped. Nothing is displayed in the reserved digestion area 640. It should be noted that this special figure 2 variable display game was started before the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game, which is an irregular big hit, and the effect adjustment command at the start is not transmitted, so that it is a small hit. In this case, as usual, the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is stopped at the small hit symbol, and the small hit effect such as the small hit fanfare effect or the small hit medium effect is executed.

Subsequently, in (ke), the hold shift is executed, and the special figure 2 variable display game, which is the main variable display game, starts in the variable display area 610 by the main display. Further, the second predetermined image 676 changes to the symbol "○" indicating that the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed, and the special figure 2 hold number display 660 changes from "2" to "1". .. Here, since the special figure 2 variable display game starts after the special figure 1 variable display game, which is an irregular jackpot, is started, the effect adjustment command is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300.

After that, in (ko), the special figure 2 variable display game, which is the main variable display game, becomes a small hit result and the big winning opening is opened. In the present embodiment, a small right-handed instruction display 658 is displayed so as not to be conspicuous in the upper right corner of the display screen, but it does not have to be displayed. In (ko), unlike the out-of-range fluctuation of the special figure 1 variable display game in (c) of FIG. 67A, the special figure 1 variable display game that results in a big hit is changing. The decorative special figure 2 variable display game, which is a variable display game of the above, stops at the missed symbol "3, 6, 8" instead of the small hit symbol "1, 2, 3" (the display device 41 stops at the small hit symbol). do not do). In the second special figure variation display unit 52 of the batch display device 50, the special figure 2 variation display game is stopped and displayed with a small hit symbol. Further, here, if the symbol does not correspond to the small hit result, the display device 41 may display a special symbol (for example, “?,?,?”) Instead of the missing symbol “3, 6, 8”.

When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a small hit result, the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted (the update of the special figure 1 game processing timer is stopped). However, in the variation display area 613 at the left end of the display screen, the variation itself of the decorative special figure 1 variation display game apparently continues. The first predetermined image 675 is a symbol “Δ” indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is suspended, and the second predetermined image 676 is that the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped. It is a symbol "x" indicating that. Nothing is displayed in the reserved digestion area 640.

Next, in (sa), the hold shift is executed, and the special figure 2 variable display game, which is the main variable display game, starts in the variable display area 610 by the main display. Further, the first predetermined image 675 changes to the symbol "○" indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed, and the special figure 2 hold number display 660 changes from "1" to "0". ..

After that, in (), the special figure 1 variable display game ends with a big hit result (irregular big hit), and in the variable display area 613 at the left end of the display screen, a small symbol (small symbol, second display mode, sub). Display) displays the jackpot stop symbol "7,7,7". In addition, "○, ○, ○" may be displayed as a big hit stop symbol. In addition, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly terminated with the result of the loss, and the drop stop symbol "2, 4, 9" is a large symbol (large symbol, first) in the variable display area 610 in the center of the display screen. It is displayed in the display mode, main display). Further, the first predetermined image 675 and the second predetermined image 676 are represented by the symbol “x”, and the special figure 1 hold display 630b (changing hold display) of the hold digestion region 640 has disappeared.

Next, (su) corresponds to the time T3 of FIG. 66 (a), and corresponds to the reception of the jackpot fanfare command by the staging control device 300, and on the display screen, a large right-handed instruction display 657 in full screen. Is displayed and the jackpot fanfare effect is displayed. For example, a character image "bonus" is displayed as a big hit fanfare effect.

After that, (se) corresponds to the time T4 in FIG. 66 (a), and after the jackpot fanfare time has elapsed, the jackpot fanfare production ends, and only the large right-handed instruction display 657 on the display screen is displayed. Is displayed.

Subsequently, (so) corresponds to the time T5 in FIG. 66 (a), and after the jackpot fanfare time and the waiting time for passing through the gate have elapsed, all of them correspond to the reception of the round command by the staging control device 300. On the screen, an image (movie) of the big hit round effect is displayed.

As described above, when the special figure 1 variable display game (subordinate variable display game) that is the big hit result (first special result) is changing in the time saving state or the probable change state, each special figure 2 variable display game ( When the main variation display game) starts, the effect adjustment command (predetermined information) is transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, as shown in FIG. 67B, the effect control device 300 responds to the received effect adjustment command (predetermined information), and the result of the special figure 2 variation display game (main variation display game) is a small hit. Even if the large winning opening is opened as a result (second special result), the stop symbol of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game on the display device 41 is set as the off symbol.

In this way, even if the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit and the large winning opening is opened, the small hit symbol is not stopped on the display device 41 (the symbol corresponding to the small hit result is stopped). It is possible to give a sense of discomfort to the player and notify in advance that the time saving state or the probability change state (small hit rush state) will end due to the irregular big hit. Therefore, the player is not surprised that the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped due to the irregular jackpot, and the player can prevent the game from being less interesting due to the irregular jackpot.

[Screen transition 2 (ii)]
FIG. 68 is an example of a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order, and shows a case where an irregular jackpot occurs while waiting for a customer in a time-saving state or a probable change state. FIG. 68 corresponds to FIGS. 66 (b) and 66 (c), respectively.

In FIG. 68 (ta), a customer waiting demo such as displaying a demo movie is executed on the display screen. Special Figure 1 The variable display game is changing in the variable display area 613 at the left end of the display screen. The first predetermined image 675 is a symbol "○" indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (changing), and the second predetermined image 676 is a special figure 2 variable display game being stopped. It is a symbol "x" indicating that. The special figure 1 hold number display 650 displays the current special figure 1 hold number "1", and the special figure 2 hold number display 660 displays the current special figure 2 hold number "0". In this embodiment, even if the special figure 1 variable display game (subordinate variable display game) is changing, the special figure 2 variable display game (main variable display game) is not executed and the special figure 2 hold number is 0. If so, it will be in a customer waiting state.

Next, (chi) corresponds to the display screen at the time T2 in FIG. 66 (b), and when the special figure 1 variable display game (subordinate variable display game) ends, the jackpot stop symbol “ 5, 5, 5 "is displayed.

Next, (tsu) corresponds to the display screen at the time T3 in FIG. 66 (b), the customer waiting demo is completed on the display screen, and the jackpot fanfare effect (“bonus”) is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. (Character display) is displayed, and a large right-handed instruction display 657 is displayed on the full screen. In the time-saving state or the probable change state, even while waiting for a customer, there is a high possibility that the game machine 10 is not in an unmanned state and the player is in the vicinity of the game machine 10, so that the game machine 10 is conspicuously large (second mode). The right-handed instruction display 657 is displayed on the display device 41. On the other hand, as described above, since there is a high possibility that the gaming machine 10 is unmanned while waiting for customers in the normal gaming state, a right-handed instruction is given to prevent an unrelated person from playing a big hit round game. The right-handed instruction display 658 in a mode smaller than the display 657 (first mode) is displayed on the display device 41 inconspicuously.

Next, (te) corresponds to the display screen at the time T4 in FIG. 66 (b), and after the jackpot fanfare time has elapsed, the jackpot fanfare effect ends, and a large right-handed hit on the full screen on the display screen. Only the instruction display 657 is displayed.

Next, (and) correspond to the display screen at the time T5 in FIG. 63 (b), and there is a high possibility that the gaming machine 10 is not in an unmanned state, and a big hit round effect is started on the full screen.

In addition, in (tsu) to (and) of FIG. 68, in the time Ta between the time T3 and the time T5, the special figure 2 is held (second start memory, special figure 2 start memory) by winning the ordinary variable winning device 37. ) Occurs, the effect on the display screen is the same.

In this way, when an irregular jackpot occurs from waiting for a customer (waiting for a customer), a predetermined display (right-handed instruction display) is displayed on the display device 41 as the gaming state changes. Irregular jackpot from the time-saving state or probable change state (second gaming state) of (1) and irregular jackpot from the normal gaming state (first gaming state) of FIG. 65B (tsu) are displayed in different manners. Is displayed. That is, in the time saving state or the probable change state (second game state), a predetermined display (right-handed instruction display) is displayed in a conspicuous second mode, and in the normal game state (first game state), a predetermined display is performed in a conspicuous first mode. It is displayed (right-handed instruction display). It should be noted that the jackpot fanfare effect may also be executed in FIG. 65B (tsu), and the jackpot fanfare effect may be displayed as a predetermined display in a mode different from that in FIG. 68 (one) (a small mode that is inconspicuous). The inconspicuous first aspect may be not only a small aspect but also a translucent aspect or a light aspect, and the conspicuous second aspect may be not only a large aspect but also a non-transparent aspect or a dark aspect.

Although the first embodiment has been described above, the processing of the effect control device 300 when the effect adjustment command is received is not limited to the case where the process is different between the normal game state and the time saving state or the probable change state. , The same process can be executed, the process in the normal gaming state and the process in the time saving state or the probable change state can be replaced from those described above, or can be changed as appropriate.

[Action / effect of the first embodiment]
In the first embodiment, the game machine 10 variablely displays the identification information based on the entry of the game ball into the main starting area or the entry of the game ball into the slave starting area different from the main starting area. A game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game and an effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of controlling an effect related to the variable display game are provided, and the result of the variable display game is special. If the result is, it is possible to generate a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. The game control means (game control device 100) includes a main variation display game executed based on the entry of the game ball into the main start area and a slave executed based on the entry of the game ball into the slave start area. It is possible to put both the variable display games in a variable state, and when the secondary variable display game has a special result (big hit result), the main variable display game is forcibly terminated. The game control means (game control device 100) is used when the main variation display game starts when the slave variation display game having a special result (big hit) is changing and the remaining variation time is within a predetermined time. Predetermined information (for example, an effect adjustment command) is transmitted to the effect control means. The staging control means (staging control device 300) is set so as not to execute a specific staging (such as SP reach, which has a higher expectation than usual or a long-time staging) when a predetermined information is received.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main variable display game from being suddenly forcibly terminated in the middle of a specific effect and the interest of the game being lowered due to the special result (irregular big hit) of the secondary variable display game. Further, since the game control means (game control device 100) does not transmit predetermined information (for example, an effect adjustment command) to the effect control means until the remaining variation time of the dependent variation display game is within a predetermined time, the dependent variation The player's recognition of the special result (irregular jackpot) of the display game is significantly delayed from the start of the variable display game, and it is possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting.

In the first embodiment, the predetermined time may be longer than the longest fluctuation time of the main variation display game. By doing so, it is possible to secure time for replacing a specific effect (for example, SP reach effect) with another effect (for example, N reach effect or no reach effect).

In the first embodiment, the staging control means (staging control device 300) is set not to execute a specific staging when a predetermined information is received, and a predetermined image (for example, a background image) is set on the display device 41. May be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to notify (notify) the jackpot (irregular jackpot) of the follow-up fluctuation display game.

In the first embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes a first starting area (for example, a starting winning opening 36) and a second starting area (for example, a normal variable winning device 37) different from the first starting area. The game control means (game control device 100) is recommended to enter the game ball into the first starting area, the first starting area becomes the main starting area, and the second starting area becomes the slave starting area. It is recommended to enter the game state (normal game state) and the game ball into the second start area, and the second start area becomes the main area and the first start area becomes the subordinate area (time reduction). State or probable change state) and can occur. In the game control means (game control device 100), in the first game state (normal game state), the subordinate variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) which is a special result (big hit) is changing and the remaining variation. When the time is within a predetermined time, when the main variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) starts, predetermined information (for example, an effect adjustment command) is transmitted to the effect control means (effect control device 300).

Therefore, in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) in which the slave variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) has a long variation, the game control means (game control device 100) has the remaining variation time of the slave variation display game. Since the predetermined information (for example, the effect adjustment command) is not transmitted to the effect control means until within a predetermined time, the player is significantly delayed in recognizing the jackpot (irregular jackpot) of the follow-variable display game. It is possible to prevent a decline in the interest of the game.

In the first embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) is used for the main variation display game executed based on the entry of the game ball into the main start area and the entry of the game ball into the slave start area. It is possible to put both the follow variable display games executed based on the variable state, and when the follow variable display game becomes the first special result (big hit result), the main variable display game is forcibly forced. To finish. The game control means (game control device 100) provides predetermined information (for example, an effect adjustment command) when the main variation display game starts when the slave variation display game that is the first special result (big hit result) is changing. ) Is transmitted to the effect control means (effect control device 300). The effect control means (effect control device 300) can display the decorative variation display game corresponding to the main variation display game on the display device 41 as an effect, and after receiving predetermined information, the main variation display game is the second special. Even if the result (small hit result) is obtained, the result (missing result, etc.) that does not correspond to the second special result (small hit result) as a result of the decoration variation display game is displayed on the display device 41.

In this way, even if the main variation display game has the second special result (small hit result) before the dependent variation display game has the first special result (irregular big hit result), it corresponds to the main variation display game. As a result of the decoration variation display game, the second special result (small hit result) cannot be displayed on the display device 41. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort, to detect in advance that the follow-up variation display game will be the first special result (irregular jackpot result), and to prevent the player from being surprised by the irregular jackpot result. It is also possible to prevent a decline in the interest of the game.

In the first embodiment, in the second gaming state (time saving state or probable change state), the main variable display game starts when the dependent variable display game that is the first special result (irregular jackpot result) is changing. At that time, predetermined information may be transmitted to the staging control means (staging control device 300). By doing so, in the second game state (time reduction state or probability change state), the dependent fluctuation display game becomes the first special result (irregular jackpot result) and the second game state (time reduction state or probability change state) ends. It is possible to make the player know in advance what to do.

In the first embodiment, when the subordinate variation display game that is a special result is changing, predetermined information (effect adjustment command) is sent to the effect control means (effect control device 300) when the main variation display game starts. It is possible to transmit, and when the effect control means (effect control device 300) receives predetermined information, a small hit result of a specific effect (for example, SP reach effect or a decorative variation display game corresponding to the main variation display game) is received. Display) is set not to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation that surprises the player and prevent a decline in the interest of the game.

In the first embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) has a first game state (normal game state) in which the probability of a special result (big hit) is low and a probability of a special result (big hit) in the first game. It is possible to generate a second gaming state (time saving state or probability change state) higher than the state. The game control means (game control device 100) sends predetermined information to the effect control means (effect control device 300) when the main variation display game starts when the dependent variation display game having a special result is changing. It can be sent. When the staging control means (staging control device 300) receives the same predetermined information (staging adjustment command), the staging control means (staging control device 300) is in the first game state (normal game state) and the second game state (time saving state or probability change state). Perform different staging controls.

Therefore, it is possible to execute appropriate staging control in both the first gaming state (normal gaming state) and the second gaming state (time saving state or probability change state). In addition, it is not necessary to provide two types of predetermined information (effect adjustment command) corresponding to the first game state (normal game state) and the second game state (time saving state or probability change state), which simplifies control. At the same time, the cost can be reduced.

In the first embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) receives a special result (big hit) from the customer waiting for the main variation display game not being executed in the first game state (normal game state). ), A predetermined display (right-handed instruction display, etc.) is displayed on the display device 41 in the first mode (inconspicuous mode, small mode, translucent mode, etc.), and the second game state (time saving state, etc.) is displayed. Or, when the slave variable display game has a special result (big hit) from waiting for a customer who is not executing the main variable display game in the probable change state), the second aspect (conspicuous aspect, large aspect, different from the first aspect, A predetermined display (right-handed instruction display, etc.) is displayed on the display device 41 in a non-transparent mode, etc.).

Therefore, in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) where the probability of a special result (big hit) is low, it is easy to become unmanned in the vicinity of the gaming machine 10 while waiting for customers, but waiting for customers in the first gaming state (normal gaming state). The display device 41 displays a predetermined display when a special result (big hit) is obtained in a mode different from that when a special result (big hit) is obtained while waiting for a customer in the second gaming state (time saving state or probability change state). By displaying on, it is possible to prevent an unrelated person from noticing a predetermined display and playing in an advantageous special gaming state.

In the first embodiment, the staging control means (staging control device 300) has a second aspect (a conspicuous aspect, a large aspect) when the subordinate variation display game has a special result from the state in which the main variation display game is being executed. , Non-transparent mode, etc.) to display a predetermined display (right-handed instruction display, etc.) on the display device. Therefore, when the slave variable display game has a special result from the state where the main variable display game is not waiting for customers, the player is normally seated in the vicinity of the gaming machine 10, and therefore, according to the second aspect. A predetermined display (right-handed instruction display, etc.) can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

[Second Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 75. The configuration other than that described below may be the same as that of the first embodiment. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first embodiment, and duplicate descriptions will be omitted as appropriate.

[Hall / player setting mode processing]
First, with reference to FIG. 69, the details of the hole / player setting mode process (B0011) in the above-mentioned main process (FIG. 47) will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hall / player setting mode processing executed by the effect control device 300. By processing the hall / player setting mode, the hall setting mode in which the staff of the hall (game store) can make various settings of the gaming machine 10 or the player setting mode in which the player can make various settings of the gaming machine 10 is activated. be able to.

The staging control device 300 first determines whether or not the hall setting mode is in progress (B0401). When the hole setting mode flag described later is set, it can be determined that the hole setting mode is in progress. When the hall setting mode is in effect (the result of B0401 is "Y"), the processing of B0406-B0416 is performed, and the effect button 25 (effect button switch 25a, touch panel 25b) is operated by a staff member of the hall (game store). Make various settings and adjustments based on.

When the effect control device 300 is not in the hall setting mode (the result of B0401 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the player setting mode is in effect (B0402). When the player setting mode flag described later is set, it can be determined that the player setting mode is in progress. When the player setting mode is in effect (the result of B0402 is "Y"), the processing of B0420-B0425 is performed, and various settings and adjustments are made based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the hole setting mode start condition is satisfied when the player setting mode is not in progress (the result of B0402 is “N”) (B0403). For example, in a predetermined situation where the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is open, the operation of the effect button 25 for entering the hall setting mode is detected as an operation signal by the effect button input process (B0010). In addition, it can be determined that the hole setting mode start condition is satisfied. When the hole setting mode start condition is not satisfied (the result of B0403 is "N"), the process of B0417 is executed.

The effect control device 300 draws a screen for starting screen drawing (drawing of the hall setting screen) for the display device 41 in the hall setting mode when the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B0403 is “Y”). Set the start (B0404). Then, the flag in the hall setting mode is set (B0405).

Next, the effect control device 300 is a hall volume adjustment process (B0406) that adjusts the volume of the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the hall staff or the like, the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration. Hall LED brightness adjustment processing (B0407) for adjusting the LED brightness of the device 46, liquid crystal brightness adjustment processing (B0408) for adjusting the brightness of the display unit (liquid crystal display, etc.) of the display device 41, and power saving for setting power saving. The setting process (B0409) is executed.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes a logo color setting process for setting the issue color of the logo accessory (B0410). Then, it is determined whether or not there is a setting confirmation operation input (B0411). When the operation signal by the setting confirmation operation of the effect button 25 is detected by the effect button input process (B0010), it can be determined that the setting confirmation operation input has been performed. When there is no setting confirmation operation input (the result of B0411 is "N"), the hall / player setting mode processing is terminated.

The staging control device 300 determines whether or not the setting is confirmed by the factory setting when the setting confirmation operation input is received (the result of B0411 is “Y”) (B0412). When the effect button 25 is not operated other than the setting confirmation operation, it can be determined that the setting is confirmed at the time of shipment from the factory. If it is not confirmed by the factory setting (the result of B0412 is "N"), the process proceeds to B0414. When the factory setting is confirmed (the result of B0412 is "Y"), the factory setting process for performing various settings and adjustments in the factory setting is executed (B0413). The factory default settings are the default settings stored in a memory such as ROM 321. Next, the hall setting data (or hall adjustment data) such as the volume and various luminances determined by B0406-B0410 and B0413 are written to the backup memory (for example, FeRAM323) (B0414).

Next, the effect control device 300 sets the screen drawing end setting for ending the screen drawing for the display device 41 in the hall setting mode (B0415). Then, the flag in the hole setting mode is cleared (B0416).

When the hall setting mode start condition is not satisfied (the result of B0403 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (B0417). It can be determined that the player setting mode start condition is satisfied when the operation of the effect button 25 for entering the player setting mode is detected as an operation signal in the effect button input process (B0010) while waiting for a customer. Note that waiting for a customer is, for example, a state in which a video for waiting for a customer (demo waiting for a customer) is displayed on the display device 41. When the player setting mode start condition is not satisfied (the result of B0417 is "N"), the hall / player setting mode processing is terminated.

When the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B0417 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 sets the screen drawing start setting for starting the screen drawing for the display device 41 in the player setting mode (the result of B0417 is “Y”). B0418). Then, the player setting mode flag is set (B0419).

Next, the effect control device 300 executes a player setting selection process (B0420) for the player to set parameters related to notification in the effect of the gaming machine. In the player setting selection process, the setting selection screen (menu screen) as shown in FIG. 70 is displayed on the display device 41, and the selection screen (adjustment screen, etc.) is displayed based on the items specified and selected by the player. It is a process.

Next, the effect control device 300 adjusts the volume of the upper speaker 10a and the lower speaker 10b as a notification means capable of executing notification regarding the effect based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player on the selection screen. The adjustment process (B0421) or the player LED brightness adjustment process (B0422) for adjusting the brightness of the LED as a notification means capable of executing the notification regarding the effect is executed in the frame decoration device 18 or the board decoration device 46.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes an effect customization process for customizing (individually setting) the effect based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the like by the player on the selection screen (B0423). Then, it is determined whether or not there is a setting confirmation operation input (as an example, the “confirmation display area 715a” described in FIG. 71 or the like is selected) (B0424). When there is no setting confirmation operation input (the result of B0424 is "N"), the hall / player setting mode processing is terminated. When there is a setting confirmation operation input (the result of B0424 is "Y"), the screen drawing end setting for ending the screen drawing for the display device 41 in the player setting mode is performed (B0425). Then, the flag in the player setting mode is cleared (B0426). Note that the player setting data (or player adjustment data) such as the volume and brightness determined by B0421-B0422 may be erased, and therefore are not written to the backup memory.

In the above, the drawing update setting (update of the highlight item in the menu display, etc.) after entering the hall setting mode or the player setting mode is performed by the effect button input process (B0010).

[Example of setting selection screen by player]
FIG. 70 is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen displayed on the display device 41 in association with the player setting selection process (B0420) in the player setting mode of the hall / player setting mode process with respect to the second embodiment. be. In the screen example shown in FIG. 70, the decorative special symbol display "3, 4, 3" is displayed in the center of the display screen. In the variable display game, this symbol corresponds to the first display mode (main display) of the special figure 1 variable display game.

In the screen example, "model introduction 631" and "volume / volume /" for displaying items that can be set by the player in the central area of the display device 41 on the front side of the symbol display "3, 4, 3". Various item display areas of "Brightness adjustment 632", "Actual machine customization 633", "Beginner course 634", and "Game log 635" are displayed in a menu format.

Further, in the screen example shown in FIG. 70, the hold digestion area 640 indicating the hold during digestion, the special figure 1 hold number display 650 for displaying the number of the special figure 1 hold, and the special figure 2 hold number are displayed. A special figure 2 hold number display 660, a first predetermined image 675 showing the execution state of the special figure 1 variable display game, and a second predetermined image 676 showing the execution state of the special figure 2 variable display game are displayed.

In the screen example of FIG. 70, each of the item display areas (“model introduction 631”, “volume / brightness adjustment 632”, “actual machine customization 633”, “beginner course 634”, “game log 635”) is displayed as a symbol. It may be displayed so as to overlap with "3, 4, 3" and the like.

In the setting selection screen (menu screen) shown in FIG. 70 described above, the player performs a touch operation by moving a finger in the vertical direction (movement of a touch portion) on the touch panel 25b of the effect button 25, thereby performing an item (setting). Items) can be specified in the order of "model introduction 631", "volume / brightness adjustment 632", "actual machine customization 633", "beginner course 634", and "game log 635". Also, by continuing the touch operation, the item can be specified in a loop.

In FIG. 70, the volume or range (frequency domain), which is a parameter related to notification, or the brightness or light amount setting of the LED (light emitting member), that is, the item “volume / brightness adjustment 632” is designated by the touch operation. It is shown that In FIG. 70, the designated item “volume / luminance adjustment 632” is displayed in a specific display mode in which the frame is thickly shown. Here, as the specific display mode of the item specified by the touch operation, in addition to the highlighting that shows the frame thickly, for example, the highlight display that brightly displays the selected item and the size of the selected item are increased. It may be enlarged.

In the present embodiment, the selection of the designated item can be confirmed by touching the central portion of the touch panel 25b. That is, in the present embodiment, the display device 41 and the effect button 25 constitute the setting means.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the player uses the touch panel 25b of the staging button 25 to perform "model introduction 631", "volume / brightness adjustment 632", "actual machine customization 633", "beginner course 634", and the like. From the "game log 635", a desired item such as "volume / brightness adjustment 632" for adjusting parameters such as volume / brightness can be specified. For example, when "adjustment of volume / brightness 632" is specified, the player setting selection process (B0420) shifts to the selection screen (adjustment screen) of FIG. 71. When "actual machine customization 633" is specified, the player shifts to the customization screen (not shown) by the player setting selection process (B0420). The item selected on the customization screen can be set by the staging customization process (B0423).

In the present embodiment, the central portion of the touch panel 25b is used as a button for confirmation, but in addition to this, another button that functions as a confirmation button may be provided. As shown in the lower part of FIG. 70, the LED 690 of the effect button 25 may be turned on so as to encourage the movement of the finger in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction.

Each of the item display areas is a customer waiting demo displayed on the screen of the display device 41 in order to make it easier for the player to see characters such as "model introduction" and "volume / brightness adjustment" indicating the contents of the item. The color is set so that it is easy to distinguish from the production. The color of characters such as "model introduction" and "adjustment of volume / brightness" indicating the contents of the item is set to a color that is symmetrical to the color set in the item display area.

Since the screen example of the player setting mode shown in FIG. 70 can be displayed while waiting for customers, the variable display games are stopped in the first predetermined image 675 and the second predetermined image 676. The symbol "x" indicating that is displayed, "0" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display 650 and the special figure 2 hold number display 660, and nothing is displayed in the hold digestion area 640. It has not been.

[Example 1 of adjustment screen (for each volume / brightness (light intensity))]
FIG. 71 shows an example of an adjustment screen (selection screen) displayed when the item “volume / brightness adjustment 632” is selected in FIG. 70. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 71, the gauge 711a of the volume setting A (normal) for setting the volume of the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b as the sound output means for outputting the sound, and the volume setting B. The gauge 711b (high expectation) is displayed. Further, a gauge 713a of the LED brightness setting A (normal) for setting the brightness (and thus the amount of light) of the LED as the light emitting member and a gauge 713b of the LED brightness setting B (high expectation) are displayed. That is, in the present embodiment, the parameters (notification parameter, effect parameter) of the notification (notification effect) when the predetermined effect is in a specific mode such that the degree of expectation is high (high) or after the specific mode is changed. ) Can be set. Here, the parameters are the volume of the speaker, the brightness of the LED, and the like.

These gauges 711a, 711b, 713a and 713b may be displayed so as to be superimposed on the decorative symbol (for example, the above-mentioned symbol display "3, 4, 3").

Further, as shown in FIG. 71, on the adjustment screen, a confirmation display area 715a for confirming the set value (parameter set value) selected in the gauges 711a, 711b, 713a and 713b, and the previous display. (That is, the return display area 715b for selecting to return to the setting selection screen shown in FIG. 70) is displayed.

Here, "normal" in the volume setting A and the LED brightness setting A means that the expected degree of jackpot of the effect being executed is a normal state (not a large state). The degree of expectation corresponds to the probability of becoming a big hit when a certain effect is executed. The normal expectation may be, for example, an expectation of several percent or less.

In the present embodiment, the volume setting A and the LED brightness setting A can adjust parameters (volume, brightness, etc.) related to the notification sound, sound effect, BGM, LED lighting, etc. used in the state of normal expectation. be. The notification sound, sound effect, and BGM may be collectively referred to as a notification sound. BGM is an abbreviation for background music, and music played along with a production may be treated as BGM.

Further, the "high expectation" in the volume setting B and the LED brightness setting B is a state in which the expectation of the jackpot of the effect being executed is higher than usual, and is an example of the "high expectation" state. Is a state in which a so-called "red hold" as a red hold display has occurred. In the present embodiment, the volume setting B and the LED brightness setting B adjust parameters (volume, brightness, etc.) related to the notification sound, sound effect, BGM, LED lighting, etc. used in this "high expectation" state. It is possible.

That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to set a notification parameter with respect to the notification executed in connection with the predetermined effect when the predetermined effect becomes a specific mode. As an example, if the predetermined effect is a hold display effect or a hold change notice, the specific mode may be a display of a red hold or a change to a red hold having a higher expectation than usual, and the notification means is a speaker and the notification means. The notification by is the reproduction (generation) of the hold generation sound and the hold change sound. In the present embodiment, the hold display effect is an effect of displaying the hold display (starting memory display) on the display device 41, and the hold change notice is an effect of changing the mode of the hold display. The hold change notice may be included in the category of the hold display effect.

The notification (notification effect) in which the parameters can be set in the volume setting B and the LED brightness setting B is for notifying the "occurrence of red hold" itself when the red hold that is higher than the normal expectation occurs. The music on hold may be played (generated) or the LED may be lit, or a notification sound (notification sound, sound effect) that is performed after (after) the "red hold" regardless of the "red hold". , BGM, etc.) may be reproduced (generated) or the LED may be lit.

As shown in FIG. 71, each of the gauges 711a, 711b, 713a and 713b displays 10 level bars whose height increases from left to right, and these correspond to the parameter settings. is doing. In FIG. 71, the level bar corresponding to the selected set value is solid-painted (in the actual machine, for example, the inside of the bar is entirely lit).

In the present embodiment, the volume of the notification sound, the sound effect, the notification sound such as BGM, etc. may change as an effect during reproduction in a series of notification effects. Similarly, in the notification lighting of the LED or the like, the brightness or the amount of light may change as the effect during the lighting in the series of notification effects.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the “set value” of the volume that can be adjusted by the player indicates, for example, the amplification factor (gain) of the amplifier circuit 337 (see FIG. 4), and is the basic volume in a series of notification effects. The level is set to, for example, "5". That is, when the "set value" is increased by one, it is set to be increased by a predetermined ratio from the basic volume level, and when the "set value" is decreased by one, it is set to be decreased by a predetermined ratio from the basic volume level.

Similarly, in the setting of the notification effect such as LED, the basic brightness level in a series of notification effects is set to, for example, "5", and when the "set value" is increased by one, a predetermined ratio is set from the basic brightness level. It is set to be larger by the amount, and when the "set value" is lowered by one, it is set to be smaller by a predetermined ratio from the basic volume level.

On the adjustment screen shown in FIG. 71, the player performs a touch operation by moving a finger in the vertical direction (movement of a touch portion) on the touch panel 25b of the effect button 25, thereby sequentially performing gauges 711a, 711b, 713a, and 713b. Can be specified in. Further, by continuing the touch operation in the vertical direction, the designation of each gauge can be performed in a loop.

Further, the player performs a touch operation by the movement of the finger in the left-right direction on the touch panel 25b of the effect button 25, thereby corresponding to the desired set value of the parameter in the selected gauge (item) to be set. You can select the level bar. Also, by continuing the touch operation in the left-right direction, the level bar can be specified in a loop.

In FIG. 71, the volume level 7 (7th from the left) is set in the gauge 711a of the volume setting A (normal), and the volume level 9 (9th from the left) is set in the gauge 711b of the volume setting B (high expectation). ) Is shown. Further, the gauge 713a of the LED brightness setting A (normal) is set to the brightness level 6 (sixth from the left side), and the gauge 713b of the LED brightness setting B (high expectation) has the brightness level 8 (eighth from the left side). The state set to is shown.

Further, in FIG. 71, it is shown that the gauge 711b of the volume setting B (high expectation degree) is selected by the touch operation in the vertical direction. In FIG. 71, the selected gauge 711b is displayed in a specific display mode showing a thick frame. Here, as the specific display mode of the item selected by the touch operation, in addition to the highlighting that shows the frame thickly, for example, the highlight display that brightly displays the selected item and the size of the selected item are increased. It may be enlarged.

In FIG. 71, the selection of the designated gauge 711b can be confirmed by selecting the confirmation display area 715a and touching the central portion of the touch panel 25b. Similarly, the set value of the level bar can be specified and confirmed by touch operation in the left-right direction. In addition, another button that functions as a confirmation button may be provided. As shown in the lower figure of FIG. 71, the LED 690 part of the effect button 25 may be turned on so as to encourage the movement of the finger in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction.

In the above, an example of setting the volume as a parameter with the gauge 711a (when the expectation is normal) and the gauge 711b (when the expectation is high) is shown, but the range (that is, the frequency domain) may be set. .. For example, when the "set value" is increased by one, the range is expanded by a predetermined ratio from the basic range, and when the "set value" is decreased by one, the range is reduced by a predetermined ratio from the basic range. Will be done. In order to adjust the sound range, the amplifier circuit 337 of the staging control device 300 may have a bandpass filter function.

As described above, according to the second embodiment, the volume (range) of the notification sound, sound effect, BGM, etc. used in the state where the expectation of the big hit is normal, that is, the volume in the upper speaker 10a and the lower speaker 10b. (Sound range) can be adjusted. Further, it is possible to adjust the brightness (light amount) of the LED used in the frame decoration device 18, the board decoration device 46, etc. in a state where the degree of expectation is normal. Similarly, it is possible to adjust the volume (range) or brightness (light amount) in a state where the expectation of the jackpot is higher than usual, that is, in a state where the predetermined effect is in a specific mode where the expectation is high.

Therefore, according to the second embodiment, regarding the notification executed in connection with various effects when the predetermined effect becomes a specific mode or in a situation that can be expected thereafter (after), the parameters of the notification are set to other situations. Can be different from. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game. Even if the notification is executed in connection with a predetermined effect (for example, a hold display effect or a hold change notice) (for example, a hold occurrence sound or a hold change sound is generated), the notification is a predetermined effect (for example, a hold display effect or a hold change notice). It may be something that is not related and is executed in relation to another effect (for example, reach effect) (for example, generation of BGM).

In the present embodiment, each of the gauges 711a, 711b, 713a, and 713b is displayed on the screen of the display device 41 in order to make the level bar easily visible to the player, as in the item display area described with reference to FIG. 70. The color is set so that it is easy to distinguish from the customer waiting demo production. Further, each of the gauges 711a, 711b, 713a, and 713b may be displayed semi-transparently so that the background customer waiting demonstration effect or the decorative pattern display "3, 4, 3" can be seen.

When the display device 41 is, for example, a normally white liquid crystal display, the gauges 711a, 711b, 713a, and 713b are set on a white background, and the area of each item display area with respect to the display screen of the display device 41 can be set. By setting as wide as possible, it is possible to save power consumption in the player setting mode.

In this embodiment, the settable range of the level bar in the gauge for setting the volume may be predetermined. For example, since both the volume setting B and the LED brightness setting B originally set parameters related to notification in a situation where the expectation is high, the range of levels that can be set by the player is, for example, the reference level 5. As mentioned above, it may be limited to 6 to 10.

Alternatively, the setting level of the volume setting B may be set so as not to be set to a level lower than the setting level of the volume setting A. For example, when level 7 is selected in the volume setting A, only one of the levels 8 to 10 can be selected in the volume setting B.

The settable range of the level bar in the gauge for setting the LED brightness can be the same as in the case of volume setting.

[Example 2 of adjustment screen (for each volume / brightness (light intensity))]
FIG. 72 illustrates another example of the adjustment screen of the item “Volume / Luminance Adjustment 632” in FIG. 70. In the screen display example shown in FIG. 72, it is possible to set more detailed items regarding the volume. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 72, the volume of the BGM and the volume of the dialogue are individually set as the volume settings.

In the example of the adjustment screen shown in FIG. 72, the gauge 717a of the BGM volume setting A (normal) for setting the BGM volume and the gauge 717b of the BGM volume setting B (high expectation) are displayed. Further, a gauge 719a of the dialogue volume setting A (normal) for setting the dialogue volume and a gauge 719b of the dialogue volume setting B (high expectation) are displayed.

Further, along with the gauge for adjusting the volume, the gauge 721 for setting the LED brightness for setting the brightness of the LED is also displayed.

These gauges 717a, 717b, 719a, 719b and 721 may be displayed on the decorative symbol (for example, the above-mentioned symbol display "3, 4, 3").

Further, on the adjustment screen, as in FIG. 71, a confirmation display area 715a for confirming the set value selected in the gauges 717a, 717b, 719a, 719b and 721, and the previous display (that is, FIG. 70) are displayed. The return display area 715b for selecting to return to the setting selection screen (shown in) is displayed.

Further, as in the display example of FIG. 71, in FIG. 72, 10 level bars whose height increases from left to right are displayed on the gauges 717a, 717b, 719a, 719b and 721. , These correspond to the parameter settings.

On the adjustment screen shown in FIG. 72, the player sequentially designates gauges 717a, 717b, 719a, 719b and 721 by performing a touch operation by moving a finger in the vertical direction on the touch panel 25b of the effect button 25. Can be done. Further, by continuing the touch operation in the vertical direction, the designation of each gauge can be performed in a loop.

Further, the player performs a touch operation by moving a finger in the left-right direction on the touch panel 25b of the effect button 25, so that the level bar corresponding to the desired set value in the selected gauge (item) to be set. Can be selected. Also, by continuing the touch operation in the left-right direction, the level bar can be specified in a loop.

In FIG. 72, the gauge 717a of the BGM volume setting A (normal) is set to the volume level 7 (seventh from the left side), and the gauge 717b of the BGM volume setting B (high expectation) has the volume level 9 (from the left side). The state set to 9th) is shown. Further, the volume level 6 (6th from the left) is set in the gauge 719a of the dialogue volume setting A (normal), and the volume level 8 (8th from the left) is set in the gauge 719b of the dialogue volume setting B (high expectation). The state set to is shown. Further, in the gauge 721 of the LED brightness setting, the state of being set to the brightness level 6 (sixth from the left) is shown.

Further, in FIG. 72, it is shown that the gauge 717a of the BGM volume setting A (normal) is selected by the touch operation in the vertical direction. In FIG. 72, the selected gauge 717a is displayed in a specific display mode showing a thick frame.

In FIG. 72, the selection of the designated gauge 717a can be confirmed by touching the central portion of the touch panel 25b. Similarly, the set value of the level bar can be specified and confirmed by touch operation in the left-right direction. In addition, another button that functions as a confirmation button may be provided. As shown in the lower part of FIG. 72, the LED 690 part of the effect button 25 may be turned on so as to encourage the movement of the finger in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the volume (range) of the notification sound, sound effect, BGM, etc. used in the normal state of expectation, that is, the volume (range) of the upper speaker 10a and the lower speaker 10b is determined. It can be set in detail for each type of notification content such as dialogue and BGM. Further, the brightness (light amount) of the LED used in the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46 in a state where the degree of expectation is normal can be finely set for each type of notification content such as dialogue and BGM. Similarly, the volume (range) in a state where the expectation of the jackpot is higher than usual, that is, in a state where the predetermined effect is in a specific mode with a high expectation, can be finely set for each type of notification content. .. Further, although not shown, the brightness (light intensity) can be finely set for each type of notification content (for example, the color of the LED or the place where the LED is arranged).

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, among the parameters related to the notification related to the effect, for example, the BGM and the dialogue volume are set with respect to the voice generated when the predetermined effect is in a specific mode or in a promising situation thereafter. It can be set individually, independently, and differently from other situations that cannot be expected. As a result, the fun of the game can be further improved.

In FIG. 72, each of the gauges 717a, 717b, 719a, 719b, and 721 is displayed on the screen of the display device 41 in order to make the level bar easier for the player to see, as in the item display area described with reference to FIG. 70. It is set to a color that is easy to distinguish from the customer waiting demo production. Further, each of the gauges 717a, 717b, 719a, 719b, and 721 may be displayed semi-transparently so that the background customer waiting demonstration effect or the decorative pattern display "3, 4, 3" can be seen.

In this embodiment, the settable range of the level bar in the gauge for setting the volume may be predetermined. For example, since both the BGM volume setting B and the dialogue volume setting B originally set parameters related to notification in a situation with a high expectation, the range of levels that can be set by the player is, for example, a reference level. It may be limited to 6 to 10, which is 5 or more.

Alternatively, the setting level of the BGM volume setting B may be set so as not to be set to a level lower than the setting level of the BGM volume setting A. For example, when level 7 is selected in the BGM volume setting A, only one of the levels 8 to 10 can be selected in the BGM volume setting B. Alternatively, when level 10 is selected in the BGM volume setting A, the BGM volume setting B can be fixed to the level 10.

Further, for example, when level 10 is selected in the BGM volume setting A, the display of the gauge 717b is changed so that the level higher than the level 10 can be set in the BGM volume setting B. You may. For example, instead of narrowing the width of the level bar, a total of 15 can be displayed.

The settable range of the level bar in the gauge 721 for setting the LED brightness can be the same as in the case of setting the volume. Similarly, the LED brightness setting may be finely set for each type of notification content. For example, the LED may be individually set for each installation site in the gaming machine.

[Screen transition example 1]
FIG. 73 shows the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order in the case where the notification by the volume / luminance set based on the volume / luminance (light amount) adjustment screen example 1 described with reference to FIG. 71 is executed. This is an example of the screen transition diagram shown. That is, regarding the volume, the volume level 7 (7th from the left) is set in the gauge 711a of the volume setting A (normal), and the volume level 9 (9 from the left side) is set in the gauge 711b of the volume setting B (high expectation). This is the case when it is set to (th). The LED brightness is set to the brightness level 6 (sixth from the left side) in the gauge 713a of the LED brightness setting A (normal), and the brightness level 8 (6th from the left side) in the gauge 713b of the LED brightness setting B (high expectation). This is the case when it is set to 8th from the left side).

Further, in FIG. 73, an LED as a notification means arranged in the upper staging unit 40c (a part of the board decoration device 46) corresponding to a specific notice (here, a dialogue notice) for notifying the expectation of a big hit. Is emitted, and a notification sound is emitted from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b as the notification means.

FIG. 73 (na) is a display screen immediately before starting the special figure 1 variable display game (decorative special figure 1 variable display game) which is the main variable display game in the normal gaming state. In the variable display area 610 in the center of the display screen, the out-of-order stop symbol "9, 4, 6" of the previous special figure 1 variable display game is displayed in large size. Further, in the variable display area 615 at the right end of the display screen, the special figure 2 variable display game (decorative special figure 2 variable display game), which is a secondary variable display game in the normal gaming state, is variablely displayed.

Further, in (a), the first predetermined image 675 showing the execution state of the special figure 1 variable display game is a symbol “x” indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped, and is a special figure. 2 The second predetermined image 676 showing the execution state of the variable display game is a symbol “◯” indicating that the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (changing). The second predetermined image 676 "◯" may blink as the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol). In the first display unit 620 of the display screen, the special figure 1 hold display 620a (special figure 1 hold display) corresponding to the special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 start memory) which is the execution right of the special figure 1 variable display game (main variable display game). 1 Start memory display) is displayed three times. Nothing is displayed in the reserved digestion area 640. Further, the special figure 1 hold number display 650 displays the current special figure 1 hold number "3", and the special figure 2 hold number display 660 displays the current special figure 2 hold number "4".

Subsequently, in FIG. 73 (d), the special figure 1 variable display game, which is the main variable display game, and the special figure 2 variable display game, which is the secondary variable display game, are both being executed. Further, the first predetermined image 675 is a symbol "○" indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed, and the second predetermined image 676 is the special figure 2 variable display game being executed. It is a symbol "○" indicating that. The first predetermined image 675 "○" and the second predetermined image 676 "○" may blink as the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol).

Further, in (d), in the first display unit 620, each special figure 1 hold display 620a is moved to the display position of the special figure 1 hold display 620a on the left side (hold shift). Further, the special figure 1 hold display 620a located at the left end of the first display unit 620 is moved from the first display unit 620 to the hold digestion area 640 (hold shift). The special figure 1 hold display 620a of the first display unit 620 is a start memory display (hold display before change) corresponding to the start memory related to the change display game before execution, whereas the special figure of the hold digestion area 640 is 1 Hold display 620a is a start memory display (holding display during change) corresponding to the start memory related to the variable display game being executed.

In (d), the special figure 1 hold display 620a located at the left end of the first display unit 620 is hold-shifted from the first display unit 620 to the hold digestion area 640, and the special figure 1 variable display game is executed. Since the game ball has passed through the start winning opening 36, the special figure 1 hold (first start memory, special figure 1 start memory), which is the right to execute the special figure 1 variable display game, is generated. Then, the special figure 1 hold display 620a corresponding to the special figure 1 hold is increased by one as a white hold display (normal hold display) with a normal expectation (normal hold occurrence occurs), and the special figure 1 hold number display 650 is currently displayed. The number "3" of the special figure 1 hold of is displayed. Further, the special figure 2 hold number display 660 displays the current special figure 2 hold number “4”.

At this time, the notification sound "cuein" for notifying "normal hold occurrence" is notified as the hold generation sound at the volume of the volume level 7 set in the gauge 711a of the volume setting A (normal) in FIG. 71.

Next, in FIG. 73 (N), on the display screen of the display device 41, the effect of notifying the expectation of the big hit while the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are both running. As a result, the character 755 of the dialogue "chance!" Is displayed as a dialogue notice together with the tiger character 754. Further, in accordance with this character display effect, the dialogue sound of "chance!" Is notified as a dialogue notice at the volume of the volume level 7 set in the gauge 711a of the volume setting A (normal) of FIG. 71.

Further, in (N), the LED arranged in the upper effect unit 40c is turned on for a predetermined period at the brightness level 6 set in the gauge 713a of the LED brightness setting A (normal). Here, the LED arranged in the upper staging unit 40c may emit light to notify that the character 754 and the character 755 of the dialogue "chance!" Are displayed (specific information), and the expectation of a big hit. It may emit light as a notification effect for notifying (specific information).

Subsequently, in FIG. 73 (ne), the game ball further passes through the start winning opening 36 while the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are both running, and the special figure 1 variable Special figure 1 hold (first start memory, special figure 1 start memory), which is the right to execute the display game, occurs. Then, the special figure 1 hold display 620c corresponding to the special figure 1 hold is increased by one as a hold display (red hold display) with a high expectation (so-called red hold occurrence), and the special figure 1 hold number display 650 is the current special figure 1. FIG. 1 Displays the number of holds "4".

At this time, the notification sound "cuein" for notifying "red hold occurrence" as the hold generation sound is greatly notified at the volume level 9 set in the gauge 711b of the volume setting B (high expectation degree) in FIG. 71. .. In this way, when the hold display effect as the predetermined effect becomes the red color display mode (specific mode), the hold generation sound executed in connection with the hold display effect is generated (notification of the hold occurrence). With respect to the above, the volume of the hold-generated sound (volume level 9) can be set to be large so as to be different from the volume (volume level 7 (d)) in the normal display mode (white color display mode).

Subsequently, in FIG. 73 (No.), on the display screen of the display device 41, the “red hold occurrence” is notified while both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are still running. Apart from the production, the character 755 of the dialogue "Chance!" Is displayed as a dialogue notice together with the tiger character 754. Further, in accordance with this character display effect, the dialogue sound of "chance!" Is notified as a dialogue notice at the volume of the volume level 9 set in the gauge 711a of the volume setting B (high expectation degree) of FIG. 71.

Further, in (No.), the LED arranged in the upper effect unit 40c is turned on for a predetermined period at the brightness level 8 set in the gauge 713b of the LED brightness setting B (high expectation degree). Here, the LED arranged in the upper effect unit 40c may emit light to notify that the character 754 and the character 755 of the dialogue "chance!" Are displayed (specific information), or may be held in red. It may emit light as a part of the effect of notifying the occurrence (specific information).

That is, in the present embodiment, after the predetermined effect (hold display effect) becomes a specific mode such as "red hold change", the character and dialogue effect are executed without being related to the predetermined effect. Regarding the notification, the notification parameter (volume of the dialogue sound) can be set by the player.

After that, in (c) of FIG. 73, the main variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) started in FIG. 73 (d) is stopped. As an example, the missing symbol "7, 4, 3" corresponding to the missing result (specific result) of the main variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) is displayed in the center of the display screen. In the state shown in FIG. 73 (c), the dependent variable display game (special FIG. 2 variable display game) is still being executed.

After that, although not shown in FIG. 73, the special figure 1 variable display game for the number of holds displayed on the special figure 1 hold number display 650 and the hold number displayed on the special figure 2 hold number display 660. Special Figure 2 Variable display games are executed in sequence.

According to the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 73, when the predetermined effect (hold display effect, hold change notice effect) becomes a specific mode such as "red hold change", it is related to the predetermined effect. It is possible to set notification parameters (volume, LED brightness) with respect to the notification (holding generation sound and LED light emission) to be executed. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the specific mode is notified based on the parameters (here, volume, LED brightness) set by the player himself / herself, the predetermined effect can be greatly excited and the game can be played. The interest is enhanced.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the predetermined effect (hold display effect, hold change notice effect) becomes a specific mode such as "red hold change", the dialogue is executed without being related to the predetermined effect. The notification parameters (here, the dialogue volume and the LED brightness) can be set by the player regarding the notification such as the notification and the light emission of the LED of the upper staging unit 40c.

As a result, in the present embodiment, there is abundant variation in the production that is executed without being related to the "red hold change" after the specific mode such as "red hold change" is reached. The production can be executed and the fun of the game can be improved.

[Example 3 of adjustment screen (notification setting corresponding to a specific effect)]
FIG. 74A is an example of an adjustment screen (selection screen) in which the setting of parameters related to notification by the player can be set corresponding to a predetermined effect. This adjustment screen may be a screen that shifts to the case where the item "volume / brightness adjustment 632" or "actual machine customization 633" of the setting selection screen (menu screen) of FIG. 70 is selected. In FIG. 74A, a gauge 722a for setting the volume up mode # 1 for raising the volume at a predetermined effect, a gauge 722b for setting the volume up mode # 2, and an LED are shown on the display screen of the display device 41. A gauge 723 for setting the brightness up mode for increasing the brightness of is displayed. In addition, a gauge 725 for setting a button vibration up mode for strengthening the vibration of the effect button 25 as a vibrating member and a gauge for setting an air vibe up mode for strengthening the air vibe (vibration feeling due to intermittent blowing of air). 727 is displayed. These gauges 722a, 722b, 723, 725 and 727 may be displayed so as to overlap with the decorative symbol (for example, the above-mentioned symbol display "3, 4, 3"). The effect button 25 can be vibrated by the built-in vibration mechanism. Air vibes can be generated by the air vibe mechanism provided on the operation handle 24.

The volume up mode # 1 is a mode in which the volume of the notification sound, the sound effect, the notification sound such as BGM used in the designated effect can be increased by the predetermined effect, and the player increases the volume. It is possible to specify an effect that triggers (increase). The gauge 722a has designated areas 731a and 731b for designating whether or not to activate the volume up mode # 1 (“on” / “off”), and “feature operation” as an opportunity to raise the volume. Designated areas 731c, 731d, 731e, 731f for designating "reach", "SP reach", "pseudo-ream third time", etc. are displayed.

Further, the volume up mode # 2 is a mode in which the volume of the notification sound, the sound effect, the notification sound such as BGM, etc. applied in the designated effect can be increased according to the stage of the predetermined effect, and the player can increase the volume. , You can specify an effect that gradually increases (increases) the volume. The gauge 722b has designated areas 733a and 733b for designating whether or not to activate the volume up mode # 2 (“on” / “off”), and “hold change” as an effect of gradually increasing the volume. , "Chance eye", "step up", "pseudo-ream", etc. are displayed as designated areas 733c, 733d, 733e, 733f. The details of the volume up mode # 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. 74B.

The brightness up mode is a mode in which the brightness (light amount) of the LED or the like applied in the designated effect can be increased, and the player can specify an effect that triggers the increase in the brightness (light amount). The gauge 723 has designated areas 735a and 735b for designating whether or not to activate the brightness up mode (“on” / “off”), and “red hold” and “reach” as an opportunity to increase the brightness. , "SP reach", "pseudo-ream third time" and the like are displayed as designated areas 735c, 735d, 735e, 735f.

The button vibration up mode is a mode in which the vibration amount of the button vibration can be increased in the notification mode for vibrating the effect button 25 applied in the designated effect, and the player can increase the button vibration. Can be specified. The gauge 725 has designated areas 737a and 737b for designating whether or not to activate the button vibration up mode (“on” / “off”), and “red hold” and “reach” as an opportunity to strengthen the button vibration. , "SP reach", "third pseudo-ream" and the like are displayed as designated areas 737c, 737d, 737e, 737f.

The air vibe up mode is a mode in which the strength of the air vibe can be increased in the notification mode of the air vibe applied in the designated effect, and the player can specify an effect that triggers the air vibe to be increased. The gauge 727 has designated areas 739a and 739b for designating whether or not to activate the air vibe up mode (“on” / “off”), and “red hold” and “reach” as an opportunity to strengthen the air vibe. , "SP reach", "pseudo-ream third time", and the like are displayed as designated areas 739c, 739d, 739e, 739f.

In addition, the volume up mode # 1, the brightness up mode, the button vibration up mode, and the air vibration up mode are not only during the execution of the effect that triggers the up, but also various effects that are executed after the effect that triggers the up. The parameters (volume, brightness (light amount) of LED, etc., vibration amount of button vibration, strength of air vibe) may be increased during execution.

Further, on the adjustment screen shown in FIG. 74A, a confirmation display area 715a for confirming the items specified in the gauges 722a, 722b, 723, 725 and 727, and a confirmation display area 715a for selecting to return to the previous display are selected. The return display area 715b is displayed.

In FIG. 74A, the player sequentially designates gauges 722a, 722b, 723, 725, and 727 by performing a touch operation by moving a finger in the vertical direction (movement of a touch portion) on the touch panel 25b of the effect button 25. can do. Further, by continuing the touch operation in the vertical direction, the designation of each gauge can be performed in a loop. The designated gauge is displayed in a thick frame in FIG. 74A.

Further, the player can specify the item to be set in the selected gauge by performing a touch operation by the movement of the finger in the left-right direction on the touch panel 25b of the effect button 25. In addition, by continuing the touch operation in the left-right direction, the item can be specified in a loop.

In FIG. 74A, among the designated areas displayed on the gauges 722a, 722b, 723, 725 and 727, the designated areas represented by diagonal lines indicate that they are selected. For example, in the gauge 722a of the volume up mode # 1, the designated area 731a corresponding to "on" indicating that the volume up mode # 1 is activated is selected, and the designated area corresponding to "SP reach" is selected as an opportunity to increase the volume. It is shown that 731e is in the selected state.

Further, in FIG. 74A, the gauge 722b is displayed in a specific display mode in which the frame is shown thick. This indicates that the gauge 722b is currently designated by the player. The player can specify a desired gauge and a designated area to be displayed in the gauge by performing a touch operation by moving a finger in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction on the touch panel 25b of the effect button 25.

Further, the player can confirm the selection of the designated gauge 711b by selecting the confirmation display area 715a and touching the central portion of the touch panel 25b. In addition, another button that functions as a confirmation button may be provided. As shown in the lower figure of FIG. 74A, the LED 690 part of the effect button 25 may be turned on so as to encourage the movement of the finger in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction.

As specific display modes of gauges and items selected by touch operation, in addition to highlighting that shows a thick frame, for example, highlighting that brightly displays the selected item and enlarging the size of the selected item. It may be enlarged and displayed.

In the volume up mode # 1 shown in FIG. 74A, for example, the volume level described in FIG. 71 is raised from the reference level 5 to the reference level 10, and the increase in the volume is set to a predetermined setting value. be able to. On the other hand, in the above mode # 1, when any of the setting items is selected from "Character operation", "Reach", "SP reach" and "Pseudo-ream 3rd time", the selected setting item is selected. On the other hand, the screen may be switched to a screen displaying a gauge for setting parameters as shown in FIG. 71. The volume setting gauge allows the setting value to be changed by the level bar as described above.

Further, in FIG. 74A, when it is possible to set a plurality of parameters and the parameters do not fit on the display screen, a plurality of setting screens may be prepared for parameter setting so that the parameters can be switched. It can also be a scroll screen. In this case, the player can operate the scroll bar displayed in the frame portion of the scroll screen to sequentially display the items not displayed on the display screen within the range of the display screen. This makes it possible to increase the items that can be set.

Next, the volume up mode # 2 will be described in detail. FIG. 74B specifically describes the effect of gradually increasing the volume in the volume up mode # 2. FIG. 74B (a) is a diagram illustrating a volume setting of the “hold change” designated in the instruction area 733c. Special Figure 1 The hold display of each hold corresponding to the execution right of the variable display game is white hold (normal hold, white hold display), blue hold (blue) in the order of low expectation → high (low → high). Hold display), red hold (red hold display), and hold change notice effect that changes the display mode (here, color) are set. In the present embodiment, a hold change sound for notifying a hold change (hold occurrence) is notified at a volume of "low" at the time of white hold, which is the first stage of hold display, and at the time of blue hold, which is the second stage. The hold change sound is notified at the volume "medium", and the hold change sound is notified at the volume "loud" at the time of the third stage, red hold. The hold display, which was white hold at the time of occurrence, may be gradually changed to blue hold and further to red hold depending on the expectation of the jackpot of the hold. Alternatively, the hold display, which was blue hold at the time of occurrence, may change to red hold depending on the expectation of the jackpot of the hold.

FIG. 74B (b) is a diagram illustrating a volume setting of the “chance eye” designated in the instruction area 733d. In the present embodiment, the "chance eye" represents a chance eye look-ahead effect. The chance pre-reading effect is a pre-reading (preliminary determination) by setting the stop result mode as a specific stop result mode when the stop result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game does not become the special result mode (big hit result mode). It is an effect of notifying the determination result (or the degree of expectation of a big hit) of the hold of the target of). The chance look-ahead effect is executed over a plurality of decorative special figure variation display games as a continuous notice effect.

The number of times the chance look-ahead effect is continued is set to 1 time → 2 times → 3 times in the order of low expectation → large (low → high). In the present embodiment, when the number of continuations of the chance look-ahead effect is 1, the chance eye stop sound is notified at the volume "low", and when the volume is "medium", the chance eye stop sound is notified. At the time of 3 times, the chance eye stop sound is notified at the volume "loud".

FIG. 74B (c) is a diagram illustrating a volume setting of “step-up” designated in the instruction area 733e. In the present embodiment, "step-up" means a step-up notice. The step-up notice is an effect in which a single effect (sub-effect) set in a plurality of stages is sequentially executed from a lower stage (step) to a predetermined stage (step).

The number of executions of the step-up notice is set to 1 time → 2 times → 3 times in the order of low expectation → high (low → high). In the present embodiment, when the number of times the step-up notice is executed is once (first stage), the sound effect is notified at the volume "low", and when it is twice (second stage), the sound effect is effective at the volume "medium". The sound is notified, and the sound effect is notified at the volume "loud" at the third time (third stage).

FIG. 74B (d) is a diagram illustrating a volume setting of the “pseudo-ream” designated in the instruction area 733f. In the present embodiment, the "pseudo-ream" represents a pseudo-continuous production. The pseudo continuous effect is an effect in which a pseudo variation for varying and temporarily stopping the decorative special symbol (identification information) is performed a predetermined number of times (predetermined step) from the start to the end of one variation display game.

The number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effect (number of pseudo-reams) is set to 2 times → 3 times → 4 times in the order of expectation degree small → large (low → high). In the present embodiment, when the number of times of execution of the pseudo continuous effect is 2, the sound effect is notified at the volume "low", when the volume is "medium", the sound effect is notified, and when the number of times is four. The sound effect is notified at the volume "loud".

As described above, in the present embodiment, the player can perform the predetermined effect in the predetermined effect (hold change advance notice effect, chance look-ahead effect, step-up advance notice effect, pseudo continuous effect, etc.) that can be executed step by step. It is possible to set parameters (volume) related to notification (generation of hold change sound, chance stop sound, sound effect) at each stage or each execution count.

In the brightness up mode, the button vibration up mode, and the air vibe mode, as in the volume up mode # 1, the notification is executed according to the notification pattern determined in advance in association with the predetermined effect.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the player is able to perform predetermined effects such as a hold change advance notice effect, a reach effect, a pseudo continuous effect, and a character movement effect in stages, the predetermined effect is, for example, It is possible to set parameters related to notification when a predetermined stage such as red hold, SP reach, pseudo-continuous nth time (the number of times of execution of pseudo-continuous effect is n times), and accessory operation is reached.

Therefore, for example, when a predetermined effect such as a hold change notice executed based on the determination result of the look-ahead process (pre-determination process) executed by the game control device 100 becomes a specific mode (for example, red hold) or thereafter. In the expected situation, the notification parameters can be changed from before. For example, if the parameter is volume, it is possible to increase the volume when the determination result of the pre-determination means is good, and keep the volume low before that or when the determination result is bad.

For this reason, it is possible to greatly enhance the effect when the predetermined effect is in a specific mode, and the interest of the game is enhanced. On the other hand, in the stage before the specific mode is set, the volume and the like can be set low and the LED brightness can be set low, so that the noise in the amusement park can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, for example, if the hold change instruction area 733c is selected, a notification effect (generation of hold change sound) for notifying the hold change is performed based on the table of the volume output pattern shown in FIG. 74B (a). The volume of the effect) is preset in each hold display mode (each stage of hold change). On the other hand, the setting value of each volume shown in FIG. 74B can be adjusted to a value desired by the player. The same applies to the brightness up mode, the button vibration up mode, and the air vibration mode.

[Screen transition example 2]
FIG. 75 is an example of a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order. In FIG. 75, a notification effect using the volume and brightness set based on the adjustment screen example described with reference to FIGS. 74A and 74B is executed. In the effect shown in FIG. 75, an LED (notification means) as a light emitting member arranged in the upper effect unit 40c is emitted, and an upper speaker 19a and a lower speaker as sound output means (notification means) capable of generating sound are emitted. A notification sound is emitted from 19b.

In FIG. 75 (ma), the special figure 1 variable display game (decorative special figure 1 variable display game), which is the main variable display game, is being executed at the center of the display screen of the display device 41, and is the right end of the display screen. In the variable display area 615 of the unit, a state in which the special figure 2 variable display game (decorative special figure 2 variable display game), which is a secondary variable display game in the normal gaming state, is variablely displayed is shown. In a state where both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are variablely displayed, the upper effect unit 40c is weakly lit with a small brightness (reference level), which is a small brightness.

Further, in (M), the first predetermined image 675 showing the execution state of the special figure 1 variable display game is a symbol “○” indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is changing, and is a special figure. 2 The second predetermined image 676 showing the execution state of the variable display game is a symbol “◯” indicating that the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (changing). The second predetermined image 676 "◯" may blink as the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol). In the first display unit 620 of the display screen, the special figure 1 hold display 620a (special figure 1 hold display) corresponding to the special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 start memory) which is the execution right of the special figure 1 variable display game (main variable display game). 1 Start memory display) is displayed twice. Further, since the special figure 1 variable display game is changing (digesting), the symbol “◯” is displayed in the reserved digestion area 640. Further, the special figure 1 hold number display 650 displays the current special figure 1 hold number "2", and the special figure 2 hold number display 660 displays the current special figure 2 hold number "4".

Next, in FIG. 75 (mi), when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are both variable and displayed, the game ball passes through the start winning opening 36, so that the special figure 1 changes. The special figure 1 hold display 620a, which is the right to execute the display game, is increased by one as a blue hold display (blue hold occurs), and the special figure 1 hold number display 650 displays the current number of special figure 1 hold "3". do. At this time, the notification sound "cuein" for notifying "blue hold occurrence" as the hold change sound or hold occurrence sound is the volume "medium" of the "hold change sound" set in the volume up mode # 2 selected in FIG. 74A. (Fig. 74B (a)). During this period, the upper staging unit 40c is lit at a low brightness (reference level).

Subsequently, in FIG. 73 (m), although a predetermined time has elapsed from FIG. 75 (mi), while the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are both variable display, FIG. 73 ( It is shown that the "blue hold" that occurred in (mi) has changed to "red hold". That is, the hold change notice as a predetermined effect is a red hold as a specific mode.

At this time, since the special figure 1 hold display 620a is changed to red hold, the notification sound “cuein” for notifying “red hold occurrence” is set to the volume up mode # 2 selected in FIG. 74A as the hold change sound. It is notified by the volume "loud" of the "holding change sound" (FIG. 74B (a)). Further, at this time, the upper effect unit 40c starts strong lighting with the brightness of the up trigger "red hold" set to the brightness up mode selected in FIG. 74A, that is, the brightness larger than the reference level (large brightness). do.

Subsequently, in (M) of FIG. 75, in the central portion of the variable display area 610, the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped in the temporary stop mode of "reach", and "reach" is notified to the display screen of the display device 41. The place is displayed. At this time, the BGM for notifying the "reach" is started at the volume "low" (reference level). The LED of the upper effect unit 40c continues to be lit at a high brightness (high brightness level) not only when the hold is changed to red hold but also while the red hold is displayed. That is, even after the hold change notice as a predetermined effect becomes a specific mode (red hold), the LED continues to light with a large brightness (large brightness) set in the brightness up mode.

Subsequently, in (mo) of FIG. 75, an effect (“SP reach”) is displayed in which the mode of “reach” is changed (developed) and a movie display area 740 for displaying a movie appears as a predetermined effect. ing. At this time, the volume of the BGM for notifying the "reach" is notified at the volume "loud" set in the volume up mode # 1 selected in FIG. 74A. During this period, the upper staging unit 40c is lit at high luminance (high luminance level).

After that, in (La) of FIG. 73, the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped. As an example, the missed symbols "3, 4, 3" corresponding to the missed result (specific result) of the special figure 1 variable display game are displayed in the center of the display screen. In (La), the special figure 2 variable display game remains in the running state.

Although not shown in FIG. 75, after that, the special figure 1 variable display game for the number of holds displayed on the special figure 1 hold number display 650 and the hold number displayed on the special figure 2 hold number display 660. Special Figure 2 Variable display games are executed in sequence.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 75, the predetermined effect (hold change effect) for changing the display mode (color) of the hold display is "white hold" → "blue hold". Depending on the change in the mode such as "change" → "red hold change", the specific mode such as "red hold change" is finally obtained. At this time, it is possible to set notification parameters (volume, LED brightness) with respect to the notification (holding change sound and LED light emission) executed in connection with the predetermined effect. Further, for example, when the reach effect as a predetermined effect develops from the normal “reach” (N reach) to the “SP reach” (specific mode, new stage), the “reach” notification (here, the BGM). (Playback) can also be set to increase the volume.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the mode of notification changes stepwise according to the increase in the degree of expectation based on the parameters (here, volume, LED brightness) set by the player himself / herself. The production can be greatly enlivened, and the fun of the game is enhanced.

In addition, in FIG. 74A, "feature operation", "reach", "SP reach", "pseudo-ream third time", "hold change", "chance eye", and "chance eye" constituting the volume up modes # 1 and # 2 "Step-up", "pseudo-ren", etc. are not limited to these. It is also possible to set the BGM and LED brightness to be increased step by step. Further, in FIG. 74A, a case where an increase in volume or brightness can be selected has been described, but conversely, a configuration in which a decrease (decrease) in volume or brightness may be set may be used.

Further, in FIG. 74A, in the volume up mode # 1, "role operation" is set as one of the triggers for increasing the volume, but the sound effect at the time of the accessory operation can be set to be gradually increased. good. Similarly, the notification sound at the start of the "third pseudo-ream" may be set to be gradually increased. Similarly, the sound effects and BGM applied after the development of "SP reach" may be set to be gradually increased.

Although the second embodiment has been described above, the notification parameters (volume, brightness, etc.) can be set not only by the player in the player setting mode of the hall / player setting mode processing, but also the hall setting. In the mode, it may be set by a hall related person such as a hall (game hall) staff member or a manager (B0406, B0407, B0408). In the hall setting mode, the brightness of the display unit (liquid crystal display or the like) of the display device 41 may also be set as a notification parameter (B0408). Further, an example in which an item or the like on the display screen of the display device 41 is selected by operating the touch panel 25b of the effect button 25 has been described. However, when the gaming machine 10 includes a so-called cross key having a cross shape, the cross key is used. Items and the like may be selected by the operation of.

Further, the second embodiment may be applied to a setting suggestion effect (B2012) that suggests a set value (probability setting value, setting). For example, the notification parameters (speaker volume and LED brightness) related to the setting suggestion effect on the screen of the display device 41 may be set on the adjustment screens of FIGS. 71 and 72. In this case, the high expectation of FIGS. 71 and 72 (high expectation) may be replaced with a high probability setting value (high setting). For example, the occurrence of red hold with high expectation of FIG. 73 is high. It may be replaced with the setting suggestion effect of the setting. Further, the setting suggestion effect may be added as a trigger for increasing the parameters (volume, brightness, button vibration and air vibe intensity) in FIG. 74A, and the parameter may be increased with the execution of the setting suggestion effect as a trigger.

In step B2012 of FIG. 55 (variable effect setting process), the content of the setting suggestion effect may be determined by lottery, but the hall staff or the like sets the lottery table used for this lottery in the hall setting mode (FIG. 69). It may be possible to set with. For example, either the lottery table A having a high appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect for all (or specific) set values or the lottery table B (default table) having a low appearance rate may be set in the hall setting mode. In the hall setting mode, the lottery table A is set when the hall staff or the like selects the on item related to the setting suggestion effect on the display screen by operating the effect button 25, and the lottery table B is set when the off item is selected. Can be done. By setting the lottery table A having a high appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect, the number of customers in the hall is improved. When the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on after a power failure (after the power is turned off), the lottery table B (default table) may be returned. As a result, the lottery table A only needs to be set in the hall setting mode only on a specific day when the number of customers is desired to be improved, so that the labor of the hall staff and the like can be saved.

Further, on the adjustment screens of FIGS. 71 and 72, the notification parameters (volume, brightness, etc.) are set separately for the state in which the normal expected degree effect is executed and the state in which the high expected degree effect is executed. In more detail, the notification parameter may be set for each state in which each effect is executed.

[Action / effect of the second embodiment]
In the second embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is a notification means (upper speaker 10a and lower) capable of executing notification related to the staging (holding change sound, sound effect, sound generation such as BGM, or light generation such as LED). Setting means (volume, LED brightness, etc.) that can be set by operating the speaker 10b, the LED of the frame decoration device 18, the LED of the board decoration device 46, and the operation means (effect button 25). The effect control device 300 and the effect button 25) are provided, and the setting means (effect control device 300 and the effect button 25) is provided with a predetermined effect (hold display effect, hold change notice effect, reach effect, pseudo continuous effect, character operation). It is possible to set parameters when or after the effect (effect, setting suggestion effect, etc.) becomes a specific mode (red hold, SP reach, pseudo-continuous nth time, accessory operation, high setting setting suggestion mode, etc.).

Therefore, the predetermined effect (hold display effect, hold change notice effect, reach effect, pseudo continuous effect, character action effect, etc.) becomes a specific mode (red hold, SP reach, pseudo-ream nth time, character operation, etc.). In a situation that can be expected at that time or after the specific mode is reached, the parameters of the notification related to the effect will be different from other situations that cannot be expected. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the second embodiment, the setting means may be able to set the parameters when or after the predetermined effect becomes a specific mode according to the content of the notification (FIG. 72). As a result, parameters (volume, LED brightness, etc.) can be increased or decreased according to the content of the notification, so that a variety of effects can be executed and the fun of the game is improved. For example, the content of the notification is BGM, dialogue, etc. in the case of notification by voice from the speaker, and the emission color and the location of the LED that emits light in the case of notification by light emission of the LED.

In the second embodiment, the setting means may be able to set whether or not to change the parameter (on / off of the up mode) when or after the predetermined effect becomes a specific mode for each predetermined effect (FIG. 74A). ). For example, the volume up mode and the brightness up mode are set for each of the hold change advance notice effect, the accessory operation effect, the SP reach effect, and the pseudo continuous effect. As a result, a wide variety of productions can be performed, and the fun of the game is improved.

In the second embodiment, the gaming machine 10 can execute an effect related to the game (variable display game), and when the result of the game is a special result (big hit), a special gaming state advantageous to the player is obtained. It can occur. The setting means can set parameters according to the degree of expectation that a special result (big hit) will occur when a predetermined effect is in a specific mode (FIG. 74B). As a result, for example, the higher the degree of expectation, the larger the parameters (volume, LED brightness, etc.) and the more exciting the effect, and the more interesting the game is.

In the second embodiment, the predetermined effect (holding change notice effect, reach effect, pseudo continuous effect, character operation effect, etc.) can be executed step by step, and the setting means (effect control device 300 and effect button 25) is used. , It is possible to set parameters when a predetermined effect (holding change notice effect, reach effect, pseudo continuous effect, character motion effect, etc.) reaches a predetermined stage. As a result, in a predetermined effect that can be executed step by step, such as a pending change notice or a pseudo continuous effect, the notification parameter related to the effect cannot be expected in a situation that can be expected when the predetermined effect reaches the predetermined stage. It will be different from the situation of. In addition, notification parameters (volume, LED brightness, etc.) can be set for each stage, and the expected degree of jackpot that increases as the stage increases can be notified by changing the parameters. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the second embodiment, the setting means (effect control device 300 and effect button 25) has a specific mode (hold display effect, hold change notice effect, reach effect, pseudo continuous effect, character operation effect, etc.). Notification (for example, hold when a specific mode of a predetermined effect is red hold) to be executed in connection with the predetermined effect when the red hold, SP reach, pseudo-ream nth time, accessory movement, etc. Parameters (volume, etc.) can be set for the generated sound, pending change sound, etc.). As a result, when the predetermined effect becomes a specific mode, the parameters of the notification executed in connection with the predetermined effect can be set, so that the predetermined effect can be greatly excited.

In the second embodiment, the setting means (effect control device 300 and effect button 25) has a specific mode (hold display effect, hold change notice effect, reach effect, pseudo continuous effect, character operation effect, etc.). Notification (for example, when a specific mode of the predetermined effect is red hold) that is executed without being related to the predetermined effect after the red hold, SP reach, the nth pseudo-ream, the character movement, etc. Parameters can be set for the BGM of the movie after the red hold change). As a result, after the predetermined effect becomes a specific mode, the parameters of the notification to be executed without being related to the predetermined effect can be set, so that a variety of effects can be executed, and the expectations of the player are aroused. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the second embodiment, a control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game in which identification information is variablely displayed, and a start storage means (game control device 100) capable of storing start memory as an execution right of the variable display game. ) And the pre-determination means (game control) capable of determining the result of the variation display game related to the start memory before the variation display game based on the start memory stored by the start storage means (game control device 100) is executed. The device 100 includes a look-ahead process and a pre-determination process), and a notice effect means (effect control device 300) that executes a predetermined effect (hold change notice) based on the determination result of the pre-determination means.

As a result, when the predetermined effect (holding change notice, etc.) executed based on the determination result of the look-ahead process (preliminary determination process) executed in the game control device 100 becomes a specific mode or becomes a specific mode. In the situation that can be expected after that, the parameters of the notification can be changed from those before that. For example, if the parameter is volume, the volume can be increased when the judgment result of the look-ahead process is good, and the volume can be kept low when the judgment result is bad before that or when the judgment result is bad to reduce the noise of the playground. ..

In the second embodiment, the notification means is a sound output means (upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b) capable of generating sound, and the parameter is the volume or sound range (upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b) of the sound output means (upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b). Frequency domain). In this way, since the parameter related to the notification is the volume or the range, the predetermined effect (hold display effect, hold change notice effect, reach effect, pseudo continuous effect, character operation effect, etc.) is a specific mode (red hold, SP reach). , Pseudo-ream nth time, accessory movement, etc.) can be set to a low volume or midrange, and a high volume or high range (low range) can be set only when a predetermined effect is set to a specific mode. Therefore, the noise of the amusement park can be reduced.

In the second embodiment, the notification means is a light emitting member (LED of the frame decoration device 18 and LED of the board decoration device 46) capable of emitting light, and the parameter can be the brightness or the amount of light of the light emitting member (LED). .. As described above, since the notification parameter is the brightness or the amount of light of the light emitting member (LED), a predetermined effect (hold display effect, hold change notice effect, reach effect, pseudo continuous effect, accessory operation effect, etc.) is a specific embodiment. It is possible to reduce the brightness or light amount until (red hold, SP reach, pseudo-continuous nth time, accessory operation, etc.), and to increase the brightness or light amount only when the predetermined effect is in a specific mode. Therefore, the eye strain of the player can be reduced.

In the second embodiment, the notification means is a vibrating vibrating member (effect button 25, vibration mechanism, air vibe mechanism), and the parameter is the magnitude of vibration of the vibrating member (effect button 25, vibration mechanism, air vibe mechanism). can do. In this way, since the notification parameter is the magnitude of the vibration of the vibrating member (effect button 25, vibration mechanism, air vibe mechanism), a predetermined effect (hold display effect, hold change notice effect, reach effect, pseudo continuous effect, role). It is possible to make a weak vibration until the object motion effect) becomes a specific mode (red hold, SP reach, pseudo-ream nth time, accessory motion, etc.), and to make a strong vibration only when the predetermined effect becomes a specific mode. can. Therefore, it is possible to give the notification effect a sharpness, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes can be made within the scope of the technical idea, and it is clear that these are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. Is. For example, it is possible to combine a plurality of embodiments. Further, for example, the present invention can be applied to other types of gaming machines (slot machines, etc.). The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of claims and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and content equivalent to the scope of claims.

10 Gaming machine 25 Direction button 30 Gaming board 32 Gaming area 36 1st start winning opening (1st starting winning area)
37 Ordinary variable winning device 38 1st special variable winning device 39 2nd special variable winning device 40 Center case 41 Display device 44 Board staging device 46 Board decoration device 50 Collective display device (LED)
100 Game control device (main board)
152 Performance display device 200 Payout control device 300 Production control device (sub-board)
400 power supply

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine that can perform production
A display device that can display the above effects and
A notification means capable of executing notification related to the effect, and
By operating the operating means, the setting means capable of setting the parameters related to the notification is provided.
The setting means is
A first setting means capable of setting the presence or absence of a change in the parameter and a second setting means different from the first setting means are provided.
When the first aspect in which the parameter is specified to change is selected by the operation of the operating means, the predetermined effect becomes a specific aspect, or thereafter. The parameters can be set to change more than before the particular embodiment.
When the second aspect in which the parameter does not change is selected in the first setting means by operating the operating means, or when the predetermined effect becomes the specific aspect or A gaming machine characterized in that the parameters after that can be set so as not to change as compared with those before the specific aspect is reached.

Images